]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blob - gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo
* gdb.texinfo (Processes): New node.
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdb.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c
4 @c %**start of header
5 @c makeinfo ignores cmds prev to setfilename, so its arg cannot make use
6 @c of @set vars. However, you can override filename with makeinfo -o.
7 @setfilename gdb.info
8 @c
9 @include gdb-cfg.texi
10 @c
11 @ifset GENERIC
12 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN}
13 @end ifset
14 @ifclear GENERIC
15 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN} (@value{TARGET})
16 @end ifclear
17 @setchapternewpage odd
18 @c %**end of header
19
20 @iftex
21 @c @smallbook
22 @c @cropmarks
23 @end iftex
24
25 @finalout
26 @syncodeindex ky cp
27
28 @c readline appendices use @vindex
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @c !!set GDB manual's edition---not the same as GDB version!
32 @set EDITION 4.12
33
34 @c !!set GDB manual's revision date
35 @set DATE January 1994
36
37 @c GDB CHANGELOG CONSULTED BETWEEN:
38 @c Fri Oct 11 23:27:06 1991 John Gilmore (gnu at cygnus.com)
39 @c Sat Dec 22 02:51:40 1990 John Gilmore (gnu at cygint)
40
41 @c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO-2 macros and info-makers to format properly.
42
43 @ifinfo
44 @c This is a dir.info fragment to support semi-automated addition of
45 @c manuals to an info tree. zoo@cygnus.com is developing this facility.
46 @format
47 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
48 * Gdb: (gdb). The GNU debugger.
49 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
50 @end format
51 @end ifinfo
52 @c
53 @c
54 @ifinfo
55 This file documents the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
56
57
58 This is Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE},
59 of @cite{Debugging with @value{GDBN}: the GNU Source-Level Debugger}
60 for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
61
62 Copyright (C) 1988, '89, '90, '91, '92, '93 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
63
64 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
65 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
66 are preserved on all copies.
67
68 @ignore
69 Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
70 results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
71 notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
72 (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
73
74 @end ignore
75 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
76 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
77 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
78 permission notice identical to this one.
79
80 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
81 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
82 @end ifinfo
83
84 @titlepage
85 @title Debugging with @value{GDBN}
86 @subtitle The GNU Source-Level Debugger
87 @ifclear GENERIC
88 @subtitle (@value{TARGET})
89 @end ifclear
90 @sp 1
91 @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, for @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN}
92 @subtitle @value{DATE}
93 @author Richard M. Stallman and Roland H. Pesch
94 @page
95 @tex
96 {\parskip=0pt
97 \hfill (Send bugs and comments on @value{GDBN} to bug-gdb\@prep.ai.mit.edu.)\par
98 \hfill {\it Debugging with @value{GDBN}}\par
99 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
100 \hfill pesch\@cygnus.com\par
101 }
102 @end tex
103
104 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
105 Copyright @copyright{} 1988, '89, '90, '91, '92, '93 Free Software
106 Foundation, Inc.
107 @sp 2
108 Published by the Free Software Foundation @*
109 675 Massachusetts Avenue, @*
110 Cambridge, MA 02139 USA @*
111 Printed copies are available for $20 each. @*
112 ISBN 1-882114-11-6 @*
113
114 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
115 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
116 are preserved on all copies.
117
118 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
119 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
120 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
121 permission notice identical to this one.
122
123 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
124 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
125 @end titlepage
126 @page
127
128 @ifinfo
129 @node Top
130 @top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
131
132 This file describes @value{GDBN}, the GNU symbolic debugger.
133
134 This is Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE}, for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
135
136 @menu
137 * Summary:: Summary of @value{GDBN}
138 @ifset NOVEL
139 * New Features:: New features since GDB version 3.5
140 @end ifset
141 @ifclear BARETARGET
142 * Sample Session:: A sample @value{GDBN} session
143 @end ifclear
144
145 * Invocation:: Getting in and out of @value{GDBN}
146 * Commands:: @value{GDBN} commands
147 * Running:: Running programs under @value{GDBN}
148 * Stopping:: Stopping and continuing
149 * Stack:: Examining the stack
150 * Source:: Examining source files
151 * Data:: Examining data
152 @ifclear CONLY
153 * Languages:: Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
154 @end ifclear
155 @ifset CONLY
156 * C:: C language support
157 @end ifset
158 @c remnant makeinfo bug, blank line needed after two end-ifs?
159
160 * Symbols:: Examining the symbol table
161 * Altering:: Altering execution
162 * GDB Files:: @value{GDBN} files
163 * Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
164 * Controlling GDB:: Controlling @value{GDBN}
165 * Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
166 @ifclear DOSHOST
167 * Emacs:: Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
168 @end ifclear
169
170 * GDB Bugs:: Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
171 * Command Line Editing:: Facilities of the readline library
172 * Using History Interactively::
173 @ifset NOVEL
174 * Renamed Commands::
175 @end ifset
176 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
177 * Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print GDB documentation
178 * Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
179 @end ifclear
180
181 * Index:: Index
182 @end menu
183 @end ifinfo
184
185 @node Summary
186 @unnumbered Summary of @value{GDBN}
187
188 The purpose of a debugger such as @value{GDBN} is to allow you to see what is
189 going on ``inside'' another program while it executes---or what another
190 program was doing at the moment it crashed.
191
192 @value{GDBN} can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
193 these) to help you catch bugs in the act:
194
195 @itemize @bullet
196 @item
197 Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its behavior.
198
199 @item
200 Make your program stop on specified conditions.
201
202 @item
203 Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.
204
205 @item
206 Change things in your program, so you can experiment with correcting the
207 effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.
208 @end itemize
209
210 @ifclear CONLY
211 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C or C++.
212 @c "MOD2" used as a "miscellaneous languages" flag here.
213 @c This is acceptable while there is no real doc for Chill and Pascal.
214 @ifclear MOD2
215 For more information, see @ref{Support,,Supported languages}.
216 @end ifclear
217 @ifset MOD2
218 For more information, see @ref{C,,C and C++}.
219
220 Support for Modula-2 and Chill is partial. For information on Modula-2,
221 see @ref{Modula-2,,Modula-2}. There is no further documentation on Chill yet.
222
223 Debugging Pascal programs which use sets, subranges, file variables, or nested
224 functions does not currently work. @value{GDBN} does not support
225 entering expressions, printing values, or similar features using Pascal syntax.
226 @end ifset
227 @ifset FORTRAN
228 @cindex Fortran
229 @value{GDBN} can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, although
230 it does not yet support entering expressions, printing values, or
231 similar features using Fortran syntax. It may be necessary to refer to
232 some variables with a trailing underscore.
233 @end ifset
234 @end ifclear
235
236 @menu
237 * Free Software:: Freely redistributable software
238 * Contributors:: Contributors to GDB
239 @end menu
240
241 @node Free Software
242 @unnumberedsec Free software
243
244 @value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the GNU General Public License
245 (GPL). The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
246 program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
247 freedom to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to
248 the source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.
249 Typical software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the
250 Free Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.
251
252 Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says that
253 you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
254 from anyone else.
255
256 @node Contributors
257 @unnumberedsec Contributors to GDB
258
259 Richard Stallman was the original author of GDB, and of many other GNU
260 programs. Many others have contributed to its development. This
261 section attempts to credit major contributors. One of the virtues of
262 free software is that everyone is free to contribute to it; with
263 regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The file
264 @file{ChangeLog} in the GDB distribution approximates a blow-by-blow
265 account.
266
267 Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
268
269 @quotation
270 @emph{Plea:} Additions to this section are particularly welcome. If you
271 or your friends (or enemies, to be evenhanded) have been unfairly
272 omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!
273 @end quotation
274
275 So that they may not regard their long labor as thankless, we
276 particularly thank those who shepherded GDB through major releases:
277 Fred Fish (releases 4.12, 4.11, 4.10, and 4.9),
278 Stu Grossman and John Gilmore (releases 4.8, 4.7, 4.6, 4.5, and 4.4),
279 John Gilmore (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and 3.9);
280 Jim Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4, and 3.3);
281 and Randy Smith (releases 3.2, 3.1, and 3.0).
282 As major maintainer of GDB for some period, each
283 contributed significantly to the structure, stability, and capabilities
284 of the entire debugger.
285
286 Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Peter TerMaat, Chris
287 Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
288
289 @ifclear CONLY
290 Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the GNU C++ support in GDB,
291 with significant additional contributions from Per Bothner. James
292 Clark wrote the GNU C++ demangler. Early work on C++ was by Peter
293 TerMaat (who also did much general update work leading to release 3.0).
294 @end ifclear
295
296 GDB 4 uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
297 object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
298 Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
299
300 David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
301 the original support for encapsulated COFF.
302
303 Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
304 Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
305 support.
306 Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support.
307 Chris Hanson improved the HP9000 support.
308 Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support.
309 David Johnson contributed Encore Umax support.
310 Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
311 Jeff Law contributed HP PA and SOM support.
312 Keith Packard contributed NS32K support.
313 Doug Rabson contributed Acorn Risc Machine support.
314 Bob Rusk contributed Harris Nighthawk CX-UX support.
315 Chris Smith contributed Convex support (and Fortran debugging).
316 Jonathan Stone contributed Pyramid support.
317 Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support.
318 Tim Tucker contributed support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode.
319 Pace Willison contributed Intel 386 support.
320 Jay Vosburgh contributed Symmetry support.
321
322 Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
323 libraries.
324
325 Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that GDB and GAS agree about
326 several machine instruction sets.
327
328 Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped
329 develop remote debugging. Intel Corporation and Wind River Systems
330 contributed remote debugging modules for their products.
331
332 Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
333 command-line editing and command history.
334
335 Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code,
336 @ifset MOD2
337 the Modula-2 support,
338 @end ifset
339 and contributed the Languages chapter of this manual.
340
341 Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
342 @ifclear CONLY
343 He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C++ overloaded
344 symbols.
345 @end ifclear
346
347 Hitachi America, Ltd. sponsored the support for Hitachi microprocessors.
348
349 Kung Hsu, Jeff Law, and Rick Sladkey added support for hardware
350 watchpoints.
351
352 Stu Grossman wrote gdbserver.
353
354 Jim Kingdon, Peter Schauer, Ian Taylor, and Stu Grossman made
355 nearly innumerable bug fixes and cleanups throughout GDB.
356
357 @ifset NOVEL
358 @node New Features
359 @unnumbered New Features since GDB Version 3.5
360
361 @table @emph
362 @item Targets
363 Using the new command @code{target}, you can select at runtime whether
364 you are debugging local files, local processes, standalone systems over
365 a serial port, or realtime systems over a TCP/IP connection. The
366 command @code{load} can download programs into a remote system. Serial
367 stubs are available for Motorola 680x0, Intel 80386, and Sparc remote
368 systems; GDB also supports debugging realtime processes running under
369 VxWorks, using SunRPC Remote Procedure Calls over TCP/IP to talk to a
370 debugger stub on the target system. Internally, GDB now uses a function
371 vector to mediate access to different targets; if you need to add your
372 own support for a remote protocol, this makes it much easier.
373
374 @item Watchpoints
375 GDB now sports watchpoints as well as breakpoints. You can use a
376 watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an expression
377 changes, without having to predict a particular place in your program
378 where this may happen.
379
380 @item Wide Output
381 Commands that issue wide output now insert newlines at places designed
382 to make the output more readable.
383
384 @item Object Code Formats
385 GDB uses a new library called the Binary File Descriptor (BFD) Library
386 to permit it to switch dynamically, without reconfiguration or
387 recompilation, between different object-file formats. Formats currently
388 supported are COFF, ELF, a.out, Intel 960 b.out, MIPS ECOFF, HPPA SOM
389 (with stabs debugging), and S-records; files may be read as .o files,
390 archive libraries, or core dumps. BFD is available as a subroutine
391 library so that other programs may take advantage of it, and the other
392 GNU binary utilities are being converted to use it.
393
394 @item Configuration and Ports
395 Compile-time configuration (to select a particular architecture and
396 operating system) is much easier. The script @code{configure} now
397 allows you to configure GDB as either a native debugger or a
398 cross-debugger. @xref{Installing GDB}, for details on how to
399 configure.
400
401 @item Interaction
402 The user interface to the GDB control variables is simpler,
403 and is consolidated in two commands, @code{set} and @code{show}. Output
404 lines are now broken at readable places, rather than overflowing onto
405 the next line. You can suppress output of machine-level addresses,
406 displaying only source language information.
407
408 @item C++
409 GDB now supports C++ multiple inheritance (if used with a GCC
410 version 2 compiler), and also has limited support for C++ exception
411 handling, with the commands @code{catch} and @code{info catch}: GDB
412 can break when an exception is raised, before the stack is peeled back
413 to the exception handler's context.
414
415 @ifset MOD2
416 @item Modula-2
417 GDB now has preliminary support for the GNU Modula-2 compiler, currently
418 under development at the State University of New York at Buffalo.
419 Coordinated development of both GDB and the GNU Modula-2 compiler will
420 continue. Other Modula-2 compilers are currently not supported, and
421 attempting to debug programs compiled with them will likely result in an
422 error as the symbol table of the executable is read in.
423 @end ifset
424
425 @item Command Rationalization
426 Many GDB commands have been renamed to make them easier to remember
427 and use. In particular, the subcommands of @code{info} and
428 @code{show}/@code{set} are grouped to make the former refer to the state
429 of your program, and the latter refer to the state of GDB itself.
430 @xref{Renamed Commands}, for details on what commands were renamed.
431
432 @item Shared Libraries
433 GDB 4 can debug programs and core files that use SunOS, SVR4, or IBM RS/6000
434 shared libraries.
435
436 @item Threads
437 On some systems, GDB 4 has facilities to debug multi-thread programs.
438
439 @item Reference Card
440 GDB 4 has a reference card. @xref{Formatting Documentation,,Formatting
441 the Documentation}, for instructions about how to print it.
442 @end table
443 @end ifset
444
445 @ifclear BARETARGET
446 @node Sample Session
447 @chapter A Sample @value{GDBN} Session
448
449 You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about @value{GDBN}.
450 However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
451 debugger. This chapter illustrates those commands.
452
453 @iftex
454 In this sample session, we emphasize user input like this: @b{input},
455 to make it easier to pick out from the surrounding output.
456 @end iftex
457
458 @c FIXME: this example may not be appropriate for some configs, where
459 @c FIXME...primary interest is in remote use.
460
461 One of the preliminary versions of GNU @code{m4} (a generic macro
462 processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
463 quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro
464 definition within another stop working. In the following short @code{m4}
465 session, we define a macro @code{foo} which expands to @code{0000}; we
466 then use the @code{m4} built-in @code{defn} to define @code{bar} as the
467 same thing. However, when we change the open quote string to
468 @code{<QUOTE>} and the close quote string to @code{<UNQUOTE>}, the same
469 procedure fails to define a new synonym @code{baz}:
470
471 @smallexample
472 $ @b{cd gnu/m4}
473 $ @b{./m4}
474 @b{define(foo,0000)}
475
476 @b{foo}
477 0000
478 @b{define(bar,defn(`foo'))}
479
480 @b{bar}
481 0000
482 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
483
484 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
485 @b{baz}
486 @b{C-d}
487 m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string
488 @end smallexample
489
490 @noindent
491 Let us use @value{GDBN} to try to see what is going on.
492
493 @smallexample
494 $ @b{@value{GDBP} m4}
495 @c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
496 @c FIXME... format to come out better.
497 GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
498 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
499 the conditions.
500 There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
501 for details.
502 GDB @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
503 (@value{GDBP})
504 @end smallexample
505
506 @noindent
507 @value{GDBN} reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the
508 rest when needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly.
509 We now tell @value{GDBN} to use a narrower display width than usual, so
510 that examples fit in this manual.
511
512 @smallexample
513 (@value{GDBP}) @b{set width 70}
514 @end smallexample
515
516 @noindent
517 We need to see how the @code{m4} built-in @code{changequote} works.
518 Having looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
519 @code{m4_changequote}, so we set a breakpoint there with the @value{GDBN}
520 @code{break} command.
521
522 @smallexample
523 (@value{GDBP}) @b{break m4_changequote}
524 Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.
525 @end smallexample
526
527 @noindent
528 Using the @code{run} command, we start @code{m4} running under @value{GDBN}
529 control; as long as control does not reach the @code{m4_changequote}
530 subroutine, the program runs as usual:
531
532 @smallexample
533 (@value{GDBP}) @b{run}
534 Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
535 @b{define(foo,0000)}
536
537 @b{foo}
538 0000
539 @end smallexample
540
541 @noindent
542 To trigger the breakpoint, we call @code{changequote}. @value{GDBN}
543 suspends execution of @code{m4}, displaying information about the
544 context where it stops.
545
546 @smallexample
547 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
548
549 Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
550 at builtin.c:879
551 879 if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
552 @end smallexample
553
554 @noindent
555 Now we use the command @code{n} (@code{next}) to advance execution to
556 the next line of the current function.
557
558 @smallexample
559 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
560 882 set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
561 : nil,
562 @end smallexample
563
564 @noindent
565 @code{set_quotes} looks like a promising subroutine. We can go into it
566 by using the command @code{s} (@code{step}) instead of @code{next}.
567 @code{step} goes to the next line to be executed in @emph{any}
568 subroutine, so it steps into @code{set_quotes}.
569
570 @smallexample
571 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
572 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
573 at input.c:530
574 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
575 @end smallexample
576
577 @noindent
578 The display that shows the subroutine where @code{m4} is now
579 suspended (and its arguments) is called a stack frame display. It
580 shows a summary of the stack. We can use the @code{backtrace}
581 command (which can also be spelled @code{bt}), to see where we are
582 in the stack as a whole: the @code{backtrace} command displays a
583 stack frame for each active subroutine.
584
585 @smallexample
586 (@value{GDBP}) @b{bt}
587 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
588 at input.c:530
589 #1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
590 at builtin.c:882
591 #2 0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
592 #3 0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
593 at macro.c:71
594 #4 0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
595 #5 0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195
596 @end smallexample
597
598 @noindent
599 We step through a few more lines to see what happens. The first two
600 times, we can use @samp{s}; the next two times we use @code{n} to avoid
601 falling into the @code{xstrdup} subroutine.
602
603 @smallexample
604 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
605 0x3b5c 532 if (rquote != def_rquote)
606 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
607 0x3b80 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? \
608 def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
609 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
610 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
611 : xstrdup(rq);
612 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
613 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
614 @end smallexample
615
616 @noindent
617 The last line displayed looks a little odd; we can examine the variables
618 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} to see if they are in fact the new left
619 and right quotes we specified. We use the command @code{p}
620 (@code{print}) to see their values.
621
622 @smallexample
623 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p lquote}
624 $1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
625 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p rquote}
626 $2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"
627 @end smallexample
628
629 @noindent
630 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} are indeed the new left and right quotes.
631 To look at some context, we can display ten lines of source
632 surrounding the current line with the @code{l} (@code{list}) command.
633
634 @smallexample
635 (@value{GDBP}) @b{l}
636 533 xfree(rquote);
637 534
638 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
639 : xstrdup (lq);
640 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
641 : xstrdup (rq);
642 537
643 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
644 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
645 540 @}
646 541
647 542 void
648 @end smallexample
649
650 @noindent
651 Let us step past the two lines that set @code{len_lquote} and
652 @code{len_rquote}, and then examine the values of those variables.
653
654 @smallexample
655 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
656 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
657 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
658 540 @}
659 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote}
660 $3 = 9
661 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote}
662 $4 = 7
663 @end smallexample
664
665 @noindent
666 That certainly looks wrong, assuming @code{len_lquote} and
667 @code{len_rquote} are meant to be the lengths of @code{lquote} and
668 @code{rquote} respectively. We can set them to better values using
669 the @code{p} command, since it can print the value of
670 any expression---and that expression can include subroutine calls and
671 assignments.
672
673 @smallexample
674 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)}
675 $5 = 7
676 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)}
677 $6 = 9
678 @end smallexample
679
680 @noindent
681 Is that enough to fix the problem of using the new quotes with the
682 @code{m4} built-in @code{defn}? We can allow @code{m4} to continue
683 executing with the @code{c} (@code{continue}) command, and then try the
684 example that caused trouble initially:
685
686 @smallexample
687 (@value{GDBP}) @b{c}
688 Continuing.
689
690 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
691
692 baz
693 0000
694 @end smallexample
695
696 @noindent
697 Success! The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones. The
698 problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
699 lengths. We allow @code{m4} exit by giving it an EOF as input:
700
701 @smallexample
702 @b{C-d}
703 Program exited normally.
704 @end smallexample
705
706 @noindent
707 The message @samp{Program exited normally.} is from @value{GDBN}; it
708 indicates @code{m4} has finished executing. We can end our @value{GDBN}
709 session with the @value{GDBN} @code{quit} command.
710
711 @smallexample
712 (@value{GDBP}) @b{quit}
713 @end smallexample
714 @end ifclear
715
716 @node Invocation
717 @chapter Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}
718
719 This chapter discusses how to start @value{GDBN}, and how to get out of it.
720 (The essentials: type @samp{@value{GDBP}} to start GDB, and type @kbd{quit}
721 or @kbd{C-d} to exit.)
722
723 @menu
724 * Invoking GDB:: How to start @value{GDBN}
725 * Quitting GDB:: How to quit @value{GDBN}
726 * Shell Commands:: How to use shell commands inside @value{GDBN}
727 @end menu
728
729 @node Invoking GDB
730 @section Invoking @value{GDBN}
731
732 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
733 For details on starting up @value{GDBP} as a
734 remote debugger attached to a Hitachi microprocessor, see @ref{Hitachi
735 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
736 @end ifset
737
738 Invoke @value{GDBN} by running the program @code{@value{GDBP}}. Once started,
739 @value{GDBN} reads commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.
740
741 You can also run @code{@value{GDBP}} with a variety of arguments and options,
742 to specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.
743
744 @ifset GENERIC
745 The command-line options described here are designed
746 to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
747 options may effectively be unavailable.
748 @end ifset
749
750 The most usual way to start @value{GDBN} is with one argument,
751 specifying an executable program:
752
753 @example
754 @value{GDBP} @var{program}
755 @end example
756
757 @ifclear BARETARGET
758 @noindent
759 You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
760 specified:
761
762 @example
763 @value{GDBP} @var{program} @var{core}
764 @end example
765
766 You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you want
767 to debug a running process:
768
769 @example
770 @value{GDBP} @var{program} 1234
771 @end example
772
773 @noindent
774 would attach @value{GDBN} to process @code{1234} (unless you also have a file
775 named @file{1234}; @value{GDBN} does check for a core file first).
776
777 Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
778 complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote debugger
779 attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of ``process'',
780 and there is often no way to get a core dump.
781 @end ifclear
782
783 @noindent
784 You can further control how @value{GDBN} starts up by using command-line
785 options. @value{GDBN} itself can remind you of the options available.
786
787 @noindent
788 Type
789
790 @example
791 @value{GDBP} -help
792 @end example
793
794 @noindent
795 to display all available options and briefly describe their use
796 (@samp{@value{GDBP} -h} is a shorter equivalent).
797
798 All options and command line arguments you give are processed
799 in sequential order. The order makes a difference when the
800 @samp{-x} option is used.
801
802
803 @menu
804 @ifclear GENERIC
805 @ifset REMOTESTUB
806 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
807 @end ifset
808 @ifset I960
809 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
810 @end ifset
811 @ifset AMD29K
812 * UDI29K Remote:: The UDI protocol for AMD29K
813 * EB29K Remote:: The EBMON protocol for AMD29K
814 @end ifset
815 @ifset VXWORKS
816 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
817 @end ifset
818 @ifset ST2000
819 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
820 @end ifset
821 @ifset H8
822 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
823 @end ifset
824 @ifset MIPS
825 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
826 @end ifset
827 @ifset SIMS
828 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
829 @end ifset
830 @end ifclear
831 @c remnant makeinfo bug requires this blank line after *two* end-ifblahs:
832
833 * File Options:: Choosing files
834 * Mode Options:: Choosing modes
835 @end menu
836
837 @ifclear GENERIC
838 @include remote.texi
839 @end ifclear
840
841 @node File Options
842 @subsection Choosing files
843
844 @ifclear BARETARGET
845 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
846 specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID). This is
847 the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
848 @samp{-c} options respectively. (@value{GDBN} reads the first argument
849 that does not have an associated option flag as equivalent to the
850 @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the second argument
851 that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as equivalent to
852 the @samp{-c} option followed by that argument.)
853 @end ifclear
854 @ifset BARETARGET
855 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any argument other than options as
856 specifying an executable file. This is the same as if the argument was
857 specified by the @samp{-se} option.
858 @end ifset
859
860 Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
861 following list. @value{GDBN} also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
862 them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
863 (If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
864 than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
865
866 @table @code
867 @item -symbols @var{file}
868 @itemx -s @var{file}
869 Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
870
871 @item -exec @var{file}
872 @itemx -e @var{file}
873 Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when
874 @ifset BARETARGET
875 appropriate.
876 @end ifset
877 @ifclear BARETARGET
878 appropriate, and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core
879 dump.
880 @end ifclear
881
882 @item -se @var{file}
883 Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
884 file.
885
886 @ifclear BARETARGET
887 @item -core @var{file}
888 @itemx -c @var{file}
889 Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
890
891 @item -c @var{number}
892 Connect to process ID @var{number}, as with the @code{attach} command
893 (unless there is a file in core-dump format named @var{number}, in which
894 case @samp{-c} specifies that file as a core dump to read).
895 @end ifclear
896
897 @item -command @var{file}
898 @itemx -x @var{file}
899 Execute @value{GDBN} commands from file @var{file}. @xref{Command
900 Files,, Command files}.
901
902 @item -directory @var{directory}
903 @itemx -d @var{directory}
904 Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source files.
905
906 @ifclear BARETARGET
907 @item -m
908 @itemx -mapped
909 @emph{Warning: this option depends on operating system facilities that are not
910 supported on all systems.}@*
911 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the @code{mmap}
912 system call, you can use this option
913 to have @value{GDBN} write the symbols from your
914 program into a reusable file in the current directory. If the program you are debugging is
915 called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file is @file{./fred.syms}.
916 Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions notice the presence of this file,
917 and can quickly map in symbol information from it, rather than reading
918 the symbol table from the executable program.
919
920 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
921 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where @value{GDBN}
922 is run. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN} symbol
923 table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
924 @end ifclear
925
926 @item -r
927 @itemx -readnow
928 Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
929 the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
930 This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
931 @end table
932
933 @ifclear BARETARGET
934 The @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options are typically combined in
935 order to build a @file{.syms} file that contains complete symbol
936 information. (@xref{Files,,Commands to specify files}, for information
937 on @file{.syms} files.) A simple GDB invocation to do nothing but build
938 a @file{.syms} file for future use is:
939
940 @example
941 gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
942 @end example
943 @end ifclear
944
945 @node Mode Options
946 @subsection Choosing modes
947
948 You can run @value{GDBN} in various alternative modes---for example, in
949 batch mode or quiet mode.
950
951 @table @code
952 @item -nx
953 @itemx -n
954 Do not execute commands from any initialization files (normally called
955 @file{@value{GDBINIT}}). Normally, the commands in these files are
956 executed after all the command options and arguments have been
957 processed. @xref{Command Files,,Command files}.
958
959 @item -quiet
960 @itemx -q
961 ``Quiet''. Do not print the introductory and copyright messages. These
962 messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
963
964 @item -batch
965 Run in batch mode. Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the
966 command files specified with @samp{-x} (and all commands from
967 initialization files, if not inhibited with @samp{-n}). Exit with
968 nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the @value{GDBN} commands
969 in the command files.
970
971 Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for example to
972 download and run a program on another computer; in order to make this
973 more useful, the message
974
975 @example
976 Program exited normally.
977 @end example
978
979 @noindent
980 (which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under @value{GDBN} control
981 terminates) is not issued when running in batch mode.
982
983 @item -cd @var{directory}
984 Run @value{GDBN} using @var{directory} as its working directory,
985 instead of the current directory.
986
987 @ifset LUCID
988 @item -context @var{authentication}
989 When the Energize programming system starts up @value{GDBN}, it uses this
990 option to trigger an alternate mode of interaction.
991 @var{authentication} is a pair of numeric codes that identify @value{GDBN}
992 as a client in the Energize environment. Avoid this option when you run
993 @value{GDBN} directly from the command line. See @ref{Energize,,Using
994 @value{GDBN} with Energize} for more discussion of using @value{GDBN} with Energize.
995 @end ifset
996
997 @ifclear DOSHOST
998 @item -fullname
999 @itemx -f
1000 Emacs sets this option when it runs @value{GDBN} as a subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN}
1001 to output the full file name and line number in a standard,
1002 recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is displayed (which
1003 includes each time your program stops). This recognizable format looks
1004 like two @samp{\032} characters, followed by the file name, line number
1005 and character position separated by colons, and a newline. The
1006 Emacs-to-@value{GDBN} interface program uses the two @samp{\032} characters as
1007 a signal to display the source code for the frame.
1008 @end ifclear
1009
1010 @ifset SERIAL
1011 @item -b @var{bps}
1012 Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
1013 interface used by @value{GDBN} for remote debugging.
1014
1015 @item -tty @var{device}
1016 Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
1017 @c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty. Investigate.
1018 @end ifset
1019 @end table
1020
1021 @node Quitting GDB
1022 @section Quitting @value{GDBN}
1023 @cindex exiting @value{GDBN}
1024 @cindex leaving @value{GDBN}
1025
1026 @table @code
1027 @item quit
1028 @kindex quit
1029 @kindex q
1030 To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated @code{q}), or type
1031 an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}).
1032 @end table
1033
1034 @cindex interrupt
1035 An interrupt (often @kbd{C-c}) does not exit from @value{GDBN}, but rather
1036 terminates the action of any @value{GDBN} command that is in progress and
1037 returns to @value{GDBN} command level. It is safe to type the interrupt
1038 character at any time because @value{GDBN} does not allow it to take effect
1039 until a time when it is safe.
1040
1041 @ifclear BARETARGET
1042 If you have been using @value{GDBN} to control an attached process or
1043 device, you can release it with the @code{detach} command
1044 (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an already-running process}).
1045 @end ifclear
1046
1047 @node Shell Commands
1048 @section Shell commands
1049
1050 If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your
1051 debugging session, there is no need to leave or suspend @value{GDBN}; you can
1052 just use the @code{shell} command.
1053
1054 @table @code
1055 @item shell @var{command string}
1056 @kindex shell
1057 @cindex shell escape
1058 Invoke a the standard shell to execute @var{command string}.
1059 @ifclear DOSHOST
1060 If it exists, the environment variable @code{SHELL} determines which
1061 shell to run. Otherwise @value{GDBN} uses @code{/bin/sh}.
1062 @end ifclear
1063 @end table
1064
1065 The utility @code{make} is often needed in development environments.
1066 You do not have to use the @code{shell} command for this purpose in
1067 @value{GDBN}:
1068
1069 @table @code
1070 @item make @var{make-args}
1071 @kindex make
1072 @cindex calling make
1073 Execute the @code{make} program with the specified
1074 arguments. This is equivalent to @samp{shell make @var{make-args}}.
1075 @end table
1076
1077 @node Commands
1078 @chapter @value{GDBN} Commands
1079
1080 You can abbreviate a @value{GDBN} command to the first few letters of the command
1081 name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
1082 @value{GDBN} commands by typing just @key{RET}. You can also use the @key{TAB}
1083 key to get @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to
1084 show you the alternatives available, if there is more than one possibility).
1085
1086 @menu
1087 * Command Syntax:: How to give commands to @value{GDBN}
1088 * Completion:: Command completion
1089 * Help:: How to ask @value{GDBN} for help
1090 @end menu
1091
1092 @node Command Syntax
1093 @section Command syntax
1094
1095 A @value{GDBN} command is a single line of input. There is no limit on
1096 how long it can be. It starts with a command name, which is followed by
1097 arguments whose meaning depends on the command name. For example, the
1098 command @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to
1099 step, as in @samp{step 5}. You can also use the @code{step} command
1100 with no arguments. Some command names do not allow any arguments.
1101
1102 @cindex abbreviation
1103 @value{GDBN} command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
1104 unambiguous. Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
1105 documentation for individual commands. In some cases, even ambiguous
1106 abbreviations are allowed; for example, @code{s} is specially defined as
1107 equivalent to @code{step} even though there are other commands whose
1108 names start with @code{s}. You can test abbreviations by using them as
1109 arguments to the @code{help} command.
1110
1111 @cindex repeating commands
1112 @kindex RET
1113 A blank line as input to @value{GDBN} (typing just @key{RET}) means to
1114 repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
1115 will not repeat this way; these are commands whose unintentional
1116 repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
1117 repeat.
1118
1119 The @code{list} and @code{x} commands, when you repeat them with
1120 @key{RET}, construct new arguments rather than repeating
1121 exactly as typed. This permits easy scanning of source or memory.
1122
1123 @value{GDBN} can also use @key{RET} in another way: to partition lengthy
1124 output, in a way similar to the common utility @code{more}
1125 (@pxref{Screen Size,,Screen size}). Since it is easy to press one
1126 @key{RET} too many in this situation, @value{GDBN} disables command
1127 repetition after any command that generates this sort of display.
1128
1129 @kindex #
1130 @cindex comment
1131 Any text from a @kbd{#} to the end of the line is a comment; it does
1132 nothing. This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command
1133 Files,,Command files}).
1134
1135 @node Completion
1136 @section Command completion
1137
1138 @cindex completion
1139 @cindex word completion
1140 @value{GDBN} can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there is
1141 only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
1142 are for the next word in a command, at any time. This works for @value{GDBN}
1143 commands, @value{GDBN} subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.
1144
1145 Press the @key{TAB} key whenever you want @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest
1146 of a word. If there is only one possibility, @value{GDBN} fills in the
1147 word, and waits for you to finish the command (or press @key{RET} to
1148 enter it). For example, if you type
1149
1150 @c FIXME "@key" does not distinguish its argument sufficiently to permit
1151 @c complete accuracy in these examples; space introduced for clarity.
1152 @c If texinfo enhancements make it unnecessary, it would be nice to
1153 @c replace " @key" by "@key" in the following...
1154 @example
1155 (@value{GDBP}) info bre @key{TAB}
1156 @end example
1157
1158 @noindent
1159 @value{GDBN} fills in the rest of the word @samp{breakpoints}, since that is
1160 the only @code{info} subcommand beginning with @samp{bre}:
1161
1162 @example
1163 (@value{GDBP}) info breakpoints
1164 @end example
1165
1166 @noindent
1167 You can either press @key{RET} at this point, to run the @code{info
1168 breakpoints} command, or backspace and enter something else, if
1169 @samp{breakpoints} does not look like the command you expected. (If you
1170 were sure you wanted @code{info breakpoints} in the first place, you
1171 might as well just type @key{RET} immediately after @samp{info bre},
1172 to exploit command abbreviations rather than command completion).
1173
1174 If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you press
1175 @key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} sounds a bell. You can either supply more
1176 characters and try again, or just press @key{TAB} a second time;
1177 @value{GDBN} displays all the possible completions for that word. For
1178 example, you might want to set a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name
1179 begins with @samp{make_}, but when you type @kbd{b make_@key{TAB}} @value{GDBN}
1180 just sounds the bell. Typing @key{TAB} again displays all the
1181 function names in your program that begin with those characters, for
1182 example:
1183
1184 @example
1185 (@value{GDBP}) b make_ @key{TAB}
1186 @exdent @value{GDBN} sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
1187 make_a_section_from_file make_environ
1188 make_abs_section make_function_type
1189 make_blockvector make_pointer_type
1190 make_cleanup make_reference_type
1191 make_command make_symbol_completion_list
1192 (@value{GDBP}) b make_
1193 @end example
1194
1195 @noindent
1196 After displaying the available possibilities, @value{GDBN} copies your
1197 partial input (@samp{b make_} in the example) so you can finish the
1198 command.
1199
1200 If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
1201 can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
1202 means @kbd{@key{META} ?}. You can type this
1203 @ifclear DOSHOST
1204 either by holding down a
1205 key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
1206 one) while typing @kbd{?}, or
1207 @end ifclear
1208 as @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
1209
1210 @cindex quotes in commands
1211 @cindex completion of quoted strings
1212 Sometimes the string you need, while logically a ``word'', may contain
1213 parentheses or other characters that @value{GDBN} normally excludes from its
1214 notion of a word. To permit word completion to work in this situation,
1215 you may enclose words in @code{'} (single quote marks) in @value{GDBN} commands.
1216
1217 @ifclear CONLY
1218 The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
1219 name of a C++ function. This is because C++ allows function overloading
1220 (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished by argument
1221 type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you may need to
1222 distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name} that takes an
1223 @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version that takes a
1224 @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the word-completion
1225 facilities in this situation, type a single quote @code{'} at the
1226 beginning of the function name. This alerts @value{GDBN} that it may need to
1227 consider more information than usual when you press @key{TAB} or
1228 @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
1229
1230 @example
1231 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @key{M-?}
1232 bubble(double,double) bubble(int,int)
1233 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1234 @end example
1235
1236 In some cases, @value{GDBN} can tell that completing a name requires using
1237 quotes. When this happens, @value{GDBN} inserts the quote for you (while
1238 completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
1239 place:
1240
1241 @example
1242 (@value{GDBP}) b bub @key{TAB}
1243 @exdent @value{GDBN} alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
1244 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1245 @end example
1246
1247 @noindent
1248 In general, @value{GDBN} can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if
1249 you have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
1250 completion on an overloaded symbol.
1251 @end ifclear
1252
1253
1254 @node Help
1255 @section Getting help
1256 @cindex online documentation
1257 @kindex help
1258
1259 You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands, using the
1260 command @code{help}.
1261
1262 @table @code
1263 @item help
1264 @itemx h
1265 @kindex h
1266 You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
1267 display a short list of named classes of commands:
1268
1269 @smallexample
1270 (@value{GDBP}) help
1271 List of classes of commands:
1272
1273 running -- Running the program
1274 stack -- Examining the stack
1275 data -- Examining data
1276 breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
1277 files -- Specifying and examining files
1278 status -- Status inquiries
1279 support -- Support facilities
1280 user-defined -- User-defined commands
1281 aliases -- Aliases of other commands
1282 obscure -- Obscure features
1283
1284 Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
1285 commands in that class.
1286 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1287 documentation.
1288 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1289 (@value{GDBP})
1290 @end smallexample
1291
1292 @item help @var{class}
1293 Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
1294 list of the individual commands in that class. For example, here is the
1295 help display for the class @code{status}:
1296
1297 @smallexample
1298 (@value{GDBP}) help status
1299 Status inquiries.
1300
1301 List of commands:
1302
1303 @c Line break in "show" line falsifies real output, but needed
1304 @c to fit in smallbook page size.
1305 show -- Generic command for showing things set
1306 with "set"
1307 info -- Generic command for printing status
1308
1309 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1310 documentation.
1311 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1312 (@value{GDBP})
1313 @end smallexample
1314
1315 @item help @var{command}
1316 With a command name as @code{help} argument, @value{GDBN} displays a
1317 short paragraph on how to use that command.
1318 @end table
1319
1320 In addition to @code{help}, you can use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{info}
1321 and @code{show} to inquire about the state of your program, or the state
1322 of @value{GDBN} itself. Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this
1323 manual introduces each of them in the appropriate context. The listings
1324 under @code{info} and under @code{show} in the Index point to
1325 all the sub-commands. @xref{Index}.
1326
1327 @c @group
1328 @table @code
1329 @item info
1330 @kindex info
1331 @kindex i
1332 This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
1333 program. For example, you can list the arguments given to your program
1334 with @code{info args}, list the registers currently in use with @code{info
1335 registers}, or list the breakpoints you have set with @code{info breakpoints}.
1336 You can get a complete list of the @code{info} sub-commands with
1337 @w{@code{help info}}.
1338
1339 @kindex show
1340 @item show
1341 In contrast, @code{show} is for describing the state of @value{GDBN} itself.
1342 You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
1343 related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
1344 system is used for displays with @code{set radix}, or simply inquire
1345 which is currently in use with @code{show radix}.
1346
1347 @kindex info set
1348 To display all the settable parameters and their current
1349 values, you can use @code{show} with no arguments; you may also use
1350 @code{info set}. Both commands produce the same display.
1351 @c FIXME: "info set" violates the rule that "info" is for state of
1352 @c FIXME...program. Ck w/ GNU: "info set" to be called something else,
1353 @c FIXME...or change desc of rule---eg "state of prog and debugging session"?
1354 @end table
1355 @c @end group
1356
1357 Here are three miscellaneous @code{show} subcommands, all of which are
1358 exceptional in lacking corresponding @code{set} commands:
1359
1360 @table @code
1361 @kindex show version
1362 @cindex version number
1363 @item show version
1364 Show what version of @value{GDBN} is running. You should include this
1365 information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports. If multiple versions of @value{GDBN} are in
1366 use at your site, you may occasionally want to determine which version
1367 of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new commands are introduced,
1368 and old ones may wither away. The version number is also announced
1369 when you start @value{GDBN}.
1370
1371 @kindex show copying
1372 @item show copying
1373 Display information about permission for copying @value{GDBN}.
1374
1375 @kindex show warranty
1376 @item show warranty
1377 Display the GNU ``NO WARRANTY'' statement.
1378 @end table
1379
1380 @node Running
1381 @chapter Running Programs Under @value{GDBN}
1382
1383 When you run a program under @value{GDBN}, you must first generate
1384 debugging information when you compile it.
1385 @ifclear BARETARGET
1386 You may start it with its arguments, if any, in an environment of your
1387 choice. You may redirect your program's input and output, debug an
1388 already running process, or kill a child process.
1389 @end ifclear
1390
1391 @menu
1392 * Compilation:: Compiling for debugging
1393 * Starting:: Starting your program
1394 @ifclear BARETARGET
1395 * Arguments:: Your program's arguments
1396 * Environment:: Your program's environment
1397 * Working Directory:: Your program's working directory
1398 * Input/Output:: Your program's input and output
1399 * Attach:: Debugging an already-running process
1400 * Kill Process:: Killing the child process
1401 * Process Information:: Additional process information
1402 * Threads:: Debugging programs with multiple threads
1403 * Processes:: Debugging programs with multiple processes
1404 @end ifclear
1405 @end menu
1406
1407 @node Compilation
1408 @section Compiling for debugging
1409
1410 In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate
1411 debugging information when you compile it. This debugging information
1412 is stored in the object file; it describes the data type of each
1413 variable or function and the correspondence between source line numbers
1414 and addresses in the executable code.
1415
1416 To request debugging information, specify the @samp{-g} option when you run
1417 the compiler.
1418
1419 Many C compilers are unable to handle the @samp{-g} and @samp{-O}
1420 options together. Using those compilers, you cannot generate optimized
1421 executables containing debugging information.
1422
1423 @value{NGCC}, the GNU C compiler, supports @samp{-g} with or without
1424 @samp{-O}, making it possible to debug optimized code. We recommend
1425 that you @emph{always} use @samp{-g} whenever you compile a program.
1426 You may think your program is correct, but there is no sense in pushing
1427 your luck.
1428
1429 @cindex optimized code, debugging
1430 @cindex debugging optimized code
1431 When you debug a program compiled with @samp{-g -O}, remember that the
1432 optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger shows you what is
1433 really there. Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
1434 exactly match your source file! An extreme example: if you define a
1435 variable, but never use it, @value{GDBN} never sees that
1436 variable---because the compiler optimizes it out of existence.
1437
1438 Some things do not work as well with @samp{-g -O} as with just
1439 @samp{-g}, particularly on machines with instruction scheduling. If in
1440 doubt, recompile with @samp{-g} alone, and if this fixes the problem,
1441 please report it as a bug (including a test case!).
1442
1443 Older versions of the GNU C compiler permitted a variant option
1444 @w{@samp{-gg}} for debugging information. @value{GDBN} no longer supports this
1445 format; if your GNU C compiler has this option, do not use it.
1446
1447 @need 2000
1448 @node Starting
1449 @section Starting your program
1450 @cindex starting
1451 @cindex running
1452
1453 @table @code
1454 @item run
1455 @itemx r
1456 @kindex run
1457 Use the @code{run} command to start your program under @value{GDBN}. You must
1458 first specify the program name
1459 @ifset VXWORKS
1460 (except on VxWorks)
1461 @end ifset
1462 with an argument to @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation, ,Getting In and
1463 Out of @value{GDBN}}), or by using the @code{file} or @code{exec-file}
1464 command (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
1465
1466 @end table
1467
1468 @ifclear BARETARGET
1469 If you are running your program in an execution environment that
1470 supports processes, @code{run} creates an inferior process and makes
1471 that process run your program. (In environments without processes,
1472 @code{run} jumps to the start of your program.)
1473
1474 The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
1475 receives from its superior. @value{GDBN} provides ways to specify this
1476 information, which you must do @emph{before} starting your program. (You
1477 can change it after starting your program, but such changes only affect
1478 your program the next time you start it.) This information may be
1479 divided into four categories:
1480
1481 @table @asis
1482 @item The @emph{arguments.}
1483 Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
1484 @code{run} command. If a shell is available on your target, the shell
1485 is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal conventions
1486 (such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution) in describing
1487 the arguments. In Unix systems, you can control which shell is used
1488 with the @code{SHELL} environment variable. @xref{Arguments, ,Your
1489 program's arguments}.
1490
1491 @item The @emph{environment.}
1492 Your program normally inherits its environment from @value{GDBN}, but you can
1493 use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{set environment} and @code{unset
1494 environment} to change parts of the environment that affect
1495 your program. @xref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}.
1496
1497 @item The @emph{working directory.}
1498 Your program inherits its working directory from @value{GDBN}. You can set
1499 the @value{GDBN} working directory with the @code{cd} command in @value{GDBN}.
1500 @xref{Working Directory, ,Your program's working directory}.
1501
1502 @item The @emph{standard input and output.}
1503 Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
1504 standard output as @value{GDBN} is using. You can redirect input and output
1505 in the @code{run} command line, or you can use the @code{tty} command to
1506 set a different device for your program.
1507 @xref{Input/Output, ,Your program's input and output}.
1508
1509 @cindex pipes
1510 @emph{Warning:} While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
1511 pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to another
1512 program; if you attempt this, @value{GDBN} is likely to wind up debugging the
1513 wrong program.
1514 @end table
1515 @end ifclear
1516
1517 When you issue the @code{run} command, your program begins to execute
1518 immediately. @xref{Stopping, ,Stopping and continuing}, for discussion
1519 of how to arrange for your program to stop. Once your program has
1520 stopped, you may call functions in your program, using the @code{print}
1521 or @code{call} commands. @xref{Data, ,Examining Data}.
1522
1523 If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the last
1524 time @value{GDBN} read its symbols, @value{GDBN} discards its symbol
1525 table, and reads it again. When it does this, @value{GDBN} tries to retain
1526 your current breakpoints.
1527
1528 @ifclear BARETARGET
1529 @node Arguments
1530 @section Your program's arguments
1531
1532 @cindex arguments (to your program)
1533 The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
1534 @code{run} command. They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard
1535 characters and performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program.
1536 Your @code{SHELL} environment variable (if it exists) specifies what
1537 shell @value{GDBN} uses. If you do not define @code{SHELL},
1538 @value{GDBN} uses @code{/bin/sh}.
1539
1540 @code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
1541 @code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
1542
1543 @kindex set args
1544 @table @code
1545 @item set args
1546 Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run. If
1547 @code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} executes your program
1548 with no arguments. Once you have run your program with arguments,
1549 using @code{set args} before the next @code{run} is the only way to run
1550 it again without arguments.
1551
1552 @item show args
1553 @kindex show args
1554 Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.
1555 @end table
1556
1557 @node Environment
1558 @section Your program's environment
1559
1560 @cindex environment (of your program)
1561 The @dfn{environment} consists of a set of environment variables and
1562 their values. Environment variables conventionally record such things as
1563 your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
1564 path for programs to run. Usually you set up environment variables with
1565 the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run. When
1566 debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a modified
1567 environment without having to start @value{GDBN} over again.
1568
1569 @table @code
1570 @item path @var{directory}
1571 @kindex path
1572 Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
1573 (the search path for executables), for both @value{GDBN} and your program.
1574 You may specify several directory names, separated by @samp{:} or
1575 whitespace. If @var{directory} is already in the path, it is moved to
1576 the front, so it is searched sooner.
1577
1578 You can use the string @samp{$cwd} to refer to whatever is the current
1579 working directory at the time @value{GDBN} searches the path. If you
1580 use @samp{.} instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
1581 @code{path} command. @value{GDBN} replaces @samp{.} in the
1582 @var{directory} argument (with the current path) before adding
1583 @var{directory} to the search path.
1584 @c 'path' is explicitly nonrepeatable, but RMS points out it is silly to
1585 @c document that, since repeating it would be a no-op.
1586
1587 @item show paths
1588 @kindex show paths
1589 Display the list of search paths for executables (the @code{PATH}
1590 environment variable).
1591
1592 @item show environment @r{[}@var{varname}@r{]}
1593 @kindex show environment
1594 Print the value of environment variable @var{varname} to be given to
1595 your program when it starts. If you do not supply @var{varname},
1596 print the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
1597 your program. You can abbreviate @code{environment} as @code{env}.
1598
1599 @item set environment @var{varname} @r{[}=@r{]} @var{value}
1600 @kindex set environment
1601 Set environment variable @var{varname} to @var{value}. The value
1602 changes for your program only, not for @value{GDBN} itself. @var{value} may
1603 be any string; the values of environment variables are just strings, and
1604 any interpretation is supplied by your program itself. The @var{value}
1605 parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to a
1606 null value.
1607 @c "any string" here does not include leading, trailing
1608 @c blanks. Gnu asks: does anyone care?
1609
1610 For example, this command:
1611
1612 @example
1613 set env USER = foo
1614 @end example
1615
1616 @noindent
1617 tells a Unix program, when subsequently run, that its user is named
1618 @samp{foo}. (The spaces around @samp{=} are used for clarity here; they
1619 are not actually required.)
1620
1621 @item unset environment @var{varname}
1622 @kindex unset environment
1623 Remove variable @var{varname} from the environment to be passed to your
1624 program. This is different from @samp{set env @var{varname} =};
1625 @code{unset environment} removes the variable from the environment,
1626 rather than assigning it an empty value.
1627 @end table
1628
1629 @emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} runs your program using the shell indicated
1630 by your @code{SHELL} environment variable if it exists (or
1631 @code{/bin/sh} if not). If your @code{SHELL} variable names a shell
1632 that runs an initialization file---such as @file{.cshrc} for C-shell, or
1633 @file{.bashrc} for BASH---any variables you set in that file affect
1634 your program. You may wish to move setting of environment variables to
1635 files that are only run when you sign on, such as @file{.login} or
1636 @file{.profile}.
1637
1638 @node Working Directory
1639 @section Your program's working directory
1640
1641 @cindex working directory (of your program)
1642 Each time you start your program with @code{run}, it inherits its
1643 working directory from the current working directory of @value{GDBN}.
1644 The @value{GDBN} working directory is initially whatever it inherited
1645 from its parent process (typically the shell), but you can specify a new
1646 working directory in @value{GDBN} with the @code{cd} command.
1647
1648 The @value{GDBN} working directory also serves as a default for the commands
1649 that specify files for @value{GDBN} to operate on. @xref{Files, ,Commands to
1650 specify files}.
1651
1652 @table @code
1653 @item cd @var{directory}
1654 @kindex cd
1655 Set the @value{GDBN} working directory to @var{directory}.
1656
1657 @item pwd
1658 @kindex pwd
1659 Print the @value{GDBN} working directory.
1660 @end table
1661
1662 @node Input/Output
1663 @section Your program's input and output
1664
1665 @cindex redirection
1666 @cindex i/o
1667 @cindex terminal
1668 By default, the program you run under @value{GDBN} does input and output to
1669 the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses. @value{GDBN} switches the terminal to
1670 its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
1671 modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
1672 running your program.
1673
1674 @table @code
1675 @item info terminal
1676 @kindex info terminal
1677 Displays information recorded by @value{GDBN} about the terminal modes your
1678 program is using.
1679 @end table
1680
1681 You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
1682 redirection with the @code{run} command. For example,
1683
1684 @example
1685 run > outfile
1686 @end example
1687
1688 @noindent
1689 starts your program, diverting its output to the file @file{outfile}.
1690
1691 @kindex tty
1692 @cindex controlling terminal
1693 Another way to specify where your program should do input and output is
1694 with the @code{tty} command. This command accepts a file name as
1695 argument, and causes this file to be the default for future @code{run}
1696 commands. It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
1697 process, for future @code{run} commands. For example,
1698
1699 @example
1700 tty /dev/ttyb
1701 @end example
1702
1703 @noindent
1704 directs that processes started with subsequent @code{run} commands
1705 default to do input and output on the terminal @file{/dev/ttyb} and have
1706 that as their controlling terminal.
1707
1708 An explicit redirection in @code{run} overrides the @code{tty} command's
1709 effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
1710 terminal.
1711
1712 When you use the @code{tty} command or redirect input in the @code{run}
1713 command, only the input @emph{for your program} is affected. The input
1714 for @value{GDBN} still comes from your terminal.
1715
1716 @node Attach
1717 @section Debugging an already-running process
1718 @kindex attach
1719 @cindex attach
1720
1721 @table @code
1722 @item attach @var{process-id}
1723 This command attaches to a running process---one that was started
1724 outside @value{GDBN}. (@code{info files} shows your active
1725 targets.) The command takes as argument a process ID. The usual way to
1726 find out the process-id of a Unix process is with the @code{ps} utility,
1727 or with the @samp{jobs -l} shell command.
1728
1729 @code{attach} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} a second time after
1730 executing the command.
1731 @end table
1732
1733 To use @code{attach}, your program must be running in an environment
1734 which supports processes; for example, @code{attach} does not work for
1735 programs on bare-board targets that lack an operating system. You must
1736 also have permission to send the process a signal.
1737
1738 When using @code{attach}, you should first use the @code{file} command
1739 to specify the program running in the process and load its symbol table.
1740 @xref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}.
1741
1742 The first thing @value{GDBN} does after arranging to debug the specified
1743 process is to stop it. You can examine and modify an attached process
1744 with all the @value{GDBN} commands that are ordinarily available when you start
1745 processes with @code{run}. You can insert breakpoints; you can step and
1746 continue; you can modify storage. If you would rather the process
1747 continue running, you may use the @code{continue} command after
1748 attaching @value{GDBN} to the process.
1749
1750 @table @code
1751 @item detach
1752 @kindex detach
1753 When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use the
1754 @code{detach} command to release it from @value{GDBN} control. Detaching
1755 the process continues its execution. After the @code{detach} command,
1756 that process and @value{GDBN} become completely independent once more, and you
1757 are ready to @code{attach} another process or start one with @code{run}.
1758 @code{detach} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
1759 executing the command.
1760 @end table
1761
1762 If you exit @value{GDBN} or use the @code{run} command while you have an
1763 attached process, you kill that process. By default, @value{GDBN} asks
1764 for confirmation if you try to do either of these things; you can
1765 control whether or not you need to confirm by using the @code{set
1766 confirm} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
1767 messages}).
1768
1769 @node Kill Process
1770 @c @group
1771 @section Killing the child process
1772
1773 @table @code
1774 @item kill
1775 @kindex kill
1776 Kill the child process in which your program is running under @value{GDBN}.
1777 @end table
1778
1779 This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
1780 running process. @value{GDBN} ignores any core dump file while your program
1781 is running.
1782 @c @end group
1783
1784 On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside @value{GDBN}
1785 while you have breakpoints set on it inside @value{GDBN}. You can use the
1786 @code{kill} command in this situation to permit running your program
1787 outside the debugger.
1788
1789 The @code{kill} command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
1790 relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
1791 executable file while it is running in a process. In this case, when you
1792 next type @code{run}, @value{GDBN} notices that the file has changed, and
1793 reads the symbol table again (while trying to preserve your current
1794 breakpoint settings).
1795
1796 @node Process Information
1797 @section Additional process information
1798
1799 @kindex /proc
1800 @cindex process image
1801 Some operating systems provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can
1802 be used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
1803 subroutines. If @value{GDBN} is configured for an operating system with this
1804 facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on several
1805 kinds of information about the process running your program.
1806
1807 @table @code
1808 @item info proc
1809 @kindex info proc
1810 Summarize available information about the process.
1811
1812 @item info proc mappings
1813 @kindex info proc mappings
1814 Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
1815 on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
1816
1817 @item info proc times
1818 @kindex info proc times
1819 Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
1820 its children.
1821
1822 @item info proc id
1823 @kindex info proc id
1824 Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
1825 the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
1826
1827 @item info proc status
1828 @kindex info proc status
1829 General information on the state of the process. If the process is
1830 stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
1831 received.
1832
1833 @item info proc all
1834 Show all the above information about the process.
1835 @end table
1836
1837 @node Threads
1838 @section Debugging programs with multiple threads
1839
1840 @cindex threads of execution
1841 @cindex multiple threads
1842 @cindex switching threads
1843 In some operating systems, a single program may have more than one
1844 @dfn{thread} of execution. The precise semantics of threads differ from
1845 one operating system to another, but in general the threads of a single
1846 program are akin to multiple processes---except that they share one
1847 address space (that is, they can all examine and modify the same
1848 variables). On the other hand, each thread has its own registers and
1849 execution stack, and perhaps private memory.
1850
1851 @value{GDBN} provides these facilities for debugging multi-thread
1852 programs:
1853
1854 @itemize @bullet
1855 @item automatic notification of new threads
1856 @item @samp{thread @var{threadno}}, a command to switch among threads
1857 @item @samp{info threads}, a command to inquire about existing threads
1858 @item thread-specific breakpoints
1859 @end itemize
1860
1861 @quotation
1862 @emph{Warning:} These facilities are not yet available on every
1863 @value{GDBN} configuration where the operating system supports threads.
1864 If your @value{GDBN} does not support threads, these commands have no
1865 effect. For example, a system without thread support shows no output
1866 from @samp{info threads}, and always rejects the @code{thread} command,
1867 like this:
1868
1869 @smallexample
1870 (@value{GDBP}) info threads
1871 (@value{GDBP}) thread 1
1872 Thread ID 1 not known. Use the "info threads" command to
1873 see the IDs of currently known threads.
1874 @end smallexample
1875 @c FIXME to implementors: how hard would it be to say "sorry, this GDB
1876 @c doesn't support threads"?
1877 @end quotation
1878
1879 @cindex focus of debugging
1880 @cindex current thread
1881 The @value{GDBN} thread debugging facility allows you to observe all
1882 threads while your program runs---but whenever @value{GDBN} takes
1883 control, one thread in particular is always the focus of debugging.
1884 This thread is called the @dfn{current thread}. Debugging commands show
1885 program information from the perspective of the current thread.
1886
1887 @kindex New @var{systag}
1888 @cindex thread identifier (system)
1889 @c FIXME-implementors!! It would be more helpful if the [New...] message
1890 @c included GDB's numeric thread handle, so you could just go to that
1891 @c thread without first checking `info threads'.
1892 Whenever @value{GDBN} detects a new thread in your program, it displays
1893 the target system's identification for the thread with a message in the
1894 form @samp{[New @var{systag}]}. @var{systag} is a thread identifier
1895 whose form varies depending on the particular system. For example, on
1896 LynxOS, you might see
1897
1898 @example
1899 [New process 35 thread 27]
1900 @end example
1901
1902 @noindent
1903 when @value{GDBN} notices a new thread. In contrast, on an SGI system,
1904 the @var{systag} is simply something like @samp{process 368}, with no
1905 further qualifier.
1906
1907 @c FIXME!! (1) Does the [New...] message appear even for the very first
1908 @c thread of a program, or does it only appear for the
1909 @c second---i.e., when it becomes obvious we have a multithread
1910 @c program?
1911 @c (2) *Is* there necessarily a first thread always? Or do some
1912 @c multithread systems permit starting a program with multiple
1913 @c threads ab initio?
1914
1915 @cindex thread number
1916 @cindex thread identifier (GDB)
1917 For debugging purposes, @value{GDBN} associates its own thread
1918 number---always a single integer---with each thread in your program.
1919
1920 @table @code
1921 @item info threads
1922 @kindex info threads
1923 Display a summary of all threads currently in your
1924 program. @value{GDBN} displays for each thread (in this order):
1925
1926 @enumerate
1927 @item the thread number assigned by @value{GDBN}
1928
1929 @item the target system's thread identifier (@var{systag})
1930
1931 @item the current stack frame summary for that thread
1932 @end enumerate
1933
1934 @noindent
1935 An asterisk @samp{*} to the left of the @value{GDBN} thread number
1936 indicates the current thread.
1937
1938 For example,
1939 @end table
1940 @c end table here to get a little more width for example
1941
1942 @smallexample
1943 (@value{GDBP}) info threads
1944 3 process 35 thread 27 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
1945 2 process 35 thread 23 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
1946 * 1 process 35 thread 13 main (argc=1, argv=0x7ffffff8)
1947 at threadtest.c:68
1948 @end smallexample
1949
1950 @table @code
1951 @item thread @var{threadno}
1952 @kindex thread @var{threadno}
1953 Make thread number @var{threadno} the current thread. The command
1954 argument @var{threadno} is the internal @value{GDBN} thread number, as
1955 shown in the first field of the @samp{info threads} display.
1956 @value{GDBN} responds by displaying the system identifier of the thread
1957 you selected, and its current stack frame summary:
1958
1959 @smallexample
1960 @c FIXME!! This example made up; find a GDB w/threads and get real one
1961 (@value{GDBP}) thread 2
1962 [Switching to process 35 thread 23]
1963 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
1964 @end smallexample
1965
1966 @noindent
1967 As with the @samp{[New @dots{}]} message, the form of the text after
1968 @samp{Switching to} depends on your system's conventions for identifying
1969 threads.
1970 @end table
1971
1972 @cindex automatic thread selection
1973 @cindex switching threads automatically
1974 @cindex threads, automatic switching
1975 Whenever @value{GDBN} stops your program, due to a breakpoint or a
1976 signal, it automatically selects the thread where that breakpoint or
1977 signal happened. @value{GDBN} alerts you to the context switch with a
1978 message of the form @samp{[Switching to @var{systag}]} to identify the
1979 thread.
1980
1981 @xref{Thread Stops,,Stopping and starting multi-thread programs}, for
1982 more information about how @value{GDBN} behaves when you stop and start
1983 programs with multiple threads.
1984
1985 @xref{Set Watchpoints,,Setting watchpoints}, for information about
1986 watchpoints in programs with multiple threads.
1987 @end ifclear
1988
1989 @node Processes
1990 @section Debugging programs with multiple processes
1991
1992 @cindex fork, debugging programs which call
1993 @cindex multiple processes
1994 @cindex processes, multiple
1995 @value{GDBN} has no special support for debugging programs which create
1996 additional processes using the @code{fork} function. When a program
1997 forks, @value{GDBN} will continue to debug the parent process and the
1998 child process will run unimpeded. If you have set a breakpoint in any
1999 code which the child then executes, the child will get a @code{SIGTRAP}
2000 signal which (unless it catches the signal) will cause it to terminate.
2001
2002 However, if you want to debug the child process there is a workaround
2003 which isn't too painful. Put a call to @code{sleep} in the code which
2004 the child process executes after the fork. It may be useful to sleep
2005 only if a certain environment variable is set, or a certain file exists,
2006 so that the delay need not occur when you don't want to run @value{GDBN}
2007 on the child. While the child is sleeping, use the @code{ps} program to
2008 get its process ID. Then tell @value{GDBN} (a new invocation of
2009 @value{GDBN} if you are also debugging the parent process) to attach to
2010 the child process (see @ref{Attach}). From that point on you can debug
2011 the child process just like any other process which you attached to.
2012
2013 @node Stopping
2014 @chapter Stopping and Continuing
2015
2016 The principal purposes of using a debugger are so that you can stop your
2017 program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
2018 trouble, you can investigate and find out why.
2019
2020 Inside @value{GDBN}, your program may stop for any of several reasons, such
2021 as
2022 @ifclear BARETARGET
2023 a signal,
2024 @end ifclear
2025 a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a @value{GDBN}
2026 command such as @code{step}. You may then examine and change
2027 variables, set new breakpoints or remove old ones, and then continue
2028 execution. Usually, the messages shown by @value{GDBN} provide ample
2029 explanation of the status of your program---but you can also explicitly
2030 request this information at any time.
2031
2032 @table @code
2033 @item info program
2034 @kindex info program
2035 Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
2036 running or not,
2037 @ifclear BARETARGET
2038 what process it is,
2039 @end ifclear
2040 and why it stopped.
2041 @end table
2042
2043 @menu
2044 @ifclear CONLY
2045 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
2046 @end ifclear
2047 @ifset CONLY
2048 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints and watchpoints
2049 @end ifset
2050 @c Remnant makeinfo bug requires blank line after *successful* end-if in menu:
2051
2052 * Continuing and Stepping:: Resuming execution
2053 @ifset POSIX
2054 * Signals:: Signals
2055 @end ifset
2056 @ifclear BARETARGET
2057 * Thread Stops:: Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
2058 @end ifclear
2059 @end menu
2060
2061 @c makeinfo node-defaulting requires adjacency of @node and sectioning cmds
2062 @c ...hence distribute @node Breakpoints over two possible @if expansions.
2063 @c
2064 @ifclear CONLY
2065 @node Breakpoints
2066 @section Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
2067 @end ifclear
2068 @ifset CONLY
2069 @node Breakpoints
2070 @section Breakpoints and watchpoints
2071 @end ifset
2072
2073 @cindex breakpoints
2074 A @dfn{breakpoint} makes your program stop whenever a certain point in
2075 the program is reached. For each breakpoint, you can add
2076 conditions to control in finer detail whether your program stops.
2077 You can set breakpoints with the @code{break} command and its variants
2078 (@pxref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}), to specify the place where
2079 your program should stop by line number, function name or exact address
2080 in the program.
2081 @ifclear CONLY
2082 In languages with exception handling (such as GNU C++), you can also set
2083 breakpoints where an exception is raised (@pxref{Exception Handling,,
2084 Breakpoints and exceptions}).
2085 @end ifclear
2086
2087 @cindex watchpoints
2088 @cindex memory tracing
2089 @cindex breakpoint on memory address
2090 @cindex breakpoint on variable modification
2091 A @dfn{watchpoint} is a special breakpoint that stops your program
2092 when the value of an expression changes. You must use a different
2093 command to set watchpoints (@pxref{Set Watchpoints, ,Setting
2094 watchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a watchpoint like
2095 any other breakpoint: you enable, disable, and delete both breakpoints
2096 and watchpoints using the same commands.
2097
2098 You can arrange to have values from your program displayed automatically
2099 whenever @value{GDBN} stops at a breakpoint. @xref{Auto Display,,
2100 Automatic display}.
2101
2102 @cindex breakpoint numbers
2103 @cindex numbers for breakpoints
2104 @value{GDBN} assigns a number to each breakpoint or watchpoint when you
2105 create it; these numbers are successive integers starting with one. In
2106 many of the commands for controlling various features of breakpoints you
2107 use the breakpoint number to say which breakpoint you want to change.
2108 Each breakpoint may be @dfn{enabled} or @dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has
2109 no effect on your program until you enable it again.
2110
2111 @menu
2112 * Set Breaks:: Setting breakpoints
2113 * Set Watchpoints:: Setting watchpoints
2114 @ifclear CONLY
2115 * Exception Handling:: Breakpoints and exceptions
2116 @end ifclear
2117
2118 * Delete Breaks:: Deleting breakpoints
2119 * Disabling:: Disabling breakpoints
2120 * Conditions:: Break conditions
2121 * Break Commands:: Breakpoint command lists
2122 @ifclear CONLY
2123 * Breakpoint Menus:: Breakpoint menus
2124 @end ifclear
2125 @ifclear BARETARGET
2126 * Error in Breakpoints:: ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2127 @end ifclear
2128 @end menu
2129
2130 @node Set Breaks
2131 @subsection Setting breakpoints
2132
2133 @c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
2134 @c consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
2135 @c
2136 @c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
2137
2138 @kindex break
2139 @kindex b
2140 @kindex $bpnum
2141 @cindex latest breakpoint
2142 Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
2143 @code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
2144 number of the beakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
2145 Vars,, Convenience variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
2146 convenience variables.
2147
2148 You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.
2149
2150 @table @code
2151 @item break @var{function}
2152 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
2153 @ifclear CONLY
2154 When using source languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as
2155 C++, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
2156 @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
2157 @end ifclear
2158
2159 @item break +@var{offset}
2160 @itemx break -@var{offset}
2161 Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
2162 at which execution stopped in the currently selected frame.
2163
2164 @item break @var{linenum}
2165 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
2166 That file is the last file whose source text was printed. This
2167 breakpoint stops your program just before it executes any of the
2168 code on that line.
2169
2170 @item break @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2171 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in source file @var{filename}.
2172
2173 @item break @var{filename}:@var{function}
2174 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function} found in file
2175 @var{filename}. Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
2176 superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
2177 functions.
2178
2179 @item break *@var{address}
2180 Set a breakpoint at address @var{address}. You can use this to set
2181 breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
2182 information or source files.
2183
2184 @item break
2185 When called without any arguments, @code{break} sets a breakpoint at
2186 the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
2187 (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the Stack}). In any selected frame but the
2188 innermost, this makes your program stop as soon as control
2189 returns to that frame. This is similar to the effect of a
2190 @code{finish} command in the frame inside the selected frame---except
2191 that @code{finish} does not leave an active breakpoint. If you use
2192 @code{break} without an argument in the innermost frame, @value{GDBN} stops
2193 the next time it reaches the current location; this may be useful
2194 inside loops.
2195
2196 @value{GDBN} normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until at
2197 least one instruction has been executed. If it did not do this, you
2198 would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without first disabling the
2199 breakpoint. This rule applies whether or not the breakpoint already
2200 existed when your program stopped.
2201
2202 @item break @dots{} if @var{cond}
2203 Set a breakpoint with condition @var{cond}; evaluate the expression
2204 @var{cond} each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the
2205 value is nonzero---that is, if @var{cond} evaluates as true.
2206 @samp{@dots{}} stands for one of the possible arguments described
2207 above (or no argument) specifying where to break. @xref{Conditions,
2208 ,Break conditions}, for more information on breakpoint conditions.
2209
2210 @item tbreak @var{args}
2211 @kindex tbreak
2212 Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args} are the
2213 same as for the @code{break} command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
2214 way, but the breakpoint is automatically deleted after the first time your
2215 program stops there. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
2216
2217 @item rbreak @var{regex}
2218 @kindex rbreak
2219 @cindex regular expression
2220 @c FIXME what kind of regexp?
2221 Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
2222 @var{regex}. This command
2223 sets an unconditional breakpoint on all matches, printing a list of all
2224 breakpoints it set. Once these breakpoints are set, they are treated
2225 just like the breakpoints set with the @code{break} command. You can
2226 delete them, disable them, or make them conditional the same way as any
2227 other breakpoint.
2228
2229 @ifclear CONLY
2230 When debugging C++ programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
2231 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
2232 classes.
2233 @end ifclear
2234
2235 @kindex info breakpoints
2236 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info breakpoints}
2237 @item info breakpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2238 @itemx info break @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2239 @itemx info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2240 Print a table of all breakpoints and watchpoints set and not
2241 deleted, with the following columns for each breakpoint:
2242
2243 @table @emph
2244 @item Breakpoint Numbers
2245 @item Type
2246 Breakpoint or watchpoint.
2247 @item Disposition
2248 Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted when hit.
2249 @item Enabled or Disabled
2250 Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}. @samp{n} marks breakpoints
2251 that are not enabled.
2252 @item Address
2253 Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address
2254 @item What
2255 Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
2256 line number.
2257 @end table
2258
2259 @noindent
2260 If a breakpoint is conditional, @code{info break} shows the condition on
2261 the line following the affected breakpoint; breakpoint commands, if any,
2262 are listed after that.
2263
2264 @noindent
2265 @code{info break} with a breakpoint
2266 number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint. The
2267 convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
2268 the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
2269 listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).
2270 @end table
2271
2272 @value{GDBN} allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
2273 your program. There is nothing silly or meaningless about this. When
2274 the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful
2275 (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2276
2277 @cindex negative breakpoint numbers
2278 @cindex internal @value{GDBN} breakpoints
2279 @value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for special
2280 purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C programs).
2281 These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers, starting with
2282 @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
2283
2284 You can see these breakpoints with the @value{GDBN} maintenance command
2285 @samp{maint info breakpoints}.
2286
2287 @table @code
2288 @kindex maint info breakpoints
2289 @item maint info breakpoints
2290 Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
2291 breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
2292 internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
2293 breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
2294 is shown:
2295
2296 @table @code
2297 @item breakpoint
2298 Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
2299
2300 @item watchpoint
2301 Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
2302
2303 @item longjmp
2304 Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
2305 @code{longjmp} calls.
2306
2307 @item longjmp resume
2308 Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
2309
2310 @item until
2311 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
2312
2313 @item finish
2314 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
2315 @end table
2316
2317 @end table
2318
2319
2320 @node Set Watchpoints
2321 @subsection Setting watchpoints
2322 @cindex setting watchpoints
2323
2324 You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
2325 expression changes, without having to predict a particular place
2326 where this may happen.
2327
2328 Watchpoints currently execute two orders of magnitude more slowly than
2329 other breakpoints, but this can be well worth it to catch errors where
2330 you have no clue what part of your program is the culprit.
2331
2332 @ignore
2333 @c this "future releases" promise has been in too long, is getting
2334 @c embarrassing. But...
2335 @c FIXME: in future updates, check whether hardware watchpoints in on any
2336 @c platforms yet. As of 26jan94, they're very close on HPPA running
2337 @c Berkeley and on Irix 4.
2338 Some processors provide special hardware to support watchpoint
2339 evaluation; future releases of @value{GDBN} will use such hardware if it
2340 is available.
2341 @end ignore
2342
2343 @table @code
2344 @kindex watch
2345 @item watch @var{expr}
2346 Set a watchpoint for an expression.
2347
2348 @kindex info watchpoints
2349 @item info watchpoints
2350 This command prints a list of watchpoints and breakpoints; it is the
2351 same as @code{info break}.
2352 @end table
2353
2354 @ifclear BARETARGET
2355 @quotation
2356 @cindex watchpoints and threads
2357 @cindex threads and watchpoints
2358 @emph{Warning:} in multi-thread programs, watchpoints have only limited
2359 usefulness. With the current watchpoint implementation, @value{GDBN}
2360 can only watch the value of an expression @emph{in a single thread}. If
2361 you are confident that the expression can only change due to the current
2362 thread's activity (and if you are also confident that no other thread
2363 can become current), then you can use watchpoints as usual. However,
2364 @value{GDBN} may not notice when a non-current thread's activity changes
2365 the expression.
2366 @end quotation
2367 @end ifclear
2368
2369 @ifclear CONLY
2370 @node Exception Handling
2371 @subsection Breakpoints and exceptions
2372 @cindex exception handlers
2373
2374 Some languages, such as GNU C++, implement exception handling. You can
2375 use @value{GDBN} to examine what caused your program to raise an exception,
2376 and to list the exceptions your program is prepared to handle at a
2377 given point in time.
2378
2379 @table @code
2380 @item catch @var{exceptions}
2381 @kindex catch
2382 You can set breakpoints at active exception handlers by using the
2383 @code{catch} command. @var{exceptions} is a list of names of exceptions
2384 to catch.
2385 @end table
2386
2387 You can use @code{info catch} to list active exception handlers.
2388 @xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}.
2389
2390 There are currently some limitations to exception handling in @value{GDBN}:
2391
2392 @itemize @bullet
2393 @item
2394 If you call a function interactively, @value{GDBN} normally returns
2395 control to you when the function has finished executing. If the call
2396 raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism that
2397 returns control to you and cause your program to simply continue
2398 running until it hits a breakpoint, catches a signal that @value{GDBN} is
2399 listening for, or exits.
2400
2401 @item
2402 You cannot raise an exception interactively.
2403
2404 @item
2405 You cannot install an exception handler interactively.
2406 @end itemize
2407
2408 @cindex raise exceptions
2409 Sometimes @code{catch} is not the best way to debug exception handling:
2410 if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better to
2411 stop @emph{before} the exception handler is called, since that way you
2412 can see the stack before any unwinding takes place. If you set a
2413 breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
2414 out where the exception was raised.
2415
2416 To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
2417 knowledge of the implementation. In the case of GNU C++, exceptions are
2418 raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
2419 which has the following ANSI C interface:
2420
2421 @example
2422 /* @var{addr} is where the exception identifier is stored.
2423 ID is the exception identifier. */
2424 void __raise_exception (void **@var{addr}, void *@var{id});
2425 @end example
2426
2427 @noindent
2428 To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack
2429 unwinding takes place, set a breakpoint on @code{__raise_exception}
2430 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions}).
2431
2432 With a conditional breakpoint (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions})
2433 that depends on the value of @var{id}, you can stop your program when
2434 a specific exception is raised. You can use multiple conditional
2435 breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
2436 raised.
2437 @end ifclear
2438
2439 @node Delete Breaks
2440 @subsection Deleting breakpoints
2441
2442 @cindex clearing breakpoints, watchpoints
2443 @cindex deleting breakpoints, watchpoints
2444 It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint or watchpoint once it
2445 has done its job and you no longer want your program to stop there. This
2446 is called @dfn{deleting} the breakpoint. A breakpoint that has been
2447 deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.
2448
2449 With the @code{clear} command you can delete breakpoints according to
2450 where they are in your program. With the @code{delete} command you can
2451 delete individual breakpoints or watchpoints by specifying their
2452 breakpoint numbers.
2453
2454 It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it. @value{GDBN}
2455 automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be executed
2456 when you continue execution without changing the execution address.
2457
2458 @table @code
2459 @item clear
2460 @kindex clear
2461 Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in the
2462 selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). When
2463 the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete a
2464 breakpoint where your program just stopped.
2465
2466 @item clear @var{function}
2467 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{function}
2468 Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the function @var{function}.
2469
2470 @item clear @var{linenum}
2471 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2472 Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified line.
2473
2474 @item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2475 @cindex delete breakpoints
2476 @kindex delete
2477 @kindex d
2478 Delete the breakpoints or watchpoints of the numbers specified as
2479 arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all breakpoints (@value{GDBN}
2480 asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set confirm off}). You
2481 can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
2482 @end table
2483
2484 @node Disabling
2485 @subsection Disabling breakpoints
2486
2487 @cindex disabled breakpoints
2488 @cindex enabled breakpoints
2489 Rather than deleting a breakpoint or watchpoint, you might prefer to
2490 @dfn{disable} it. This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if it had
2491 been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so that
2492 you can @dfn{enable} it again later.
2493
2494 You disable and enable breakpoints and watchpoints with the
2495 @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands, optionally specifying one or
2496 more breakpoint numbers as arguments. Use @code{info break} or
2497 @code{info watch} to print a list of breakpoints or watchpoints if you
2498 do not know which numbers to use.
2499
2500 A breakpoint or watchpoint can have any of four different states of
2501 enablement:
2502
2503 @itemize @bullet
2504 @item
2505 Enabled. The breakpoint stops your program. A breakpoint set
2506 with the @code{break} command starts out in this state.
2507 @item
2508 Disabled. The breakpoint has no effect on your program.
2509 @item
2510 Enabled once. The breakpoint stops your program, but then becomes
2511 disabled. A breakpoint set with the @code{tbreak} command starts out in
2512 this state.
2513 @item
2514 Enabled for deletion. The breakpoint stops your program, but
2515 immediately after it does so it is deleted permanently.
2516 @end itemize
2517
2518 You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints and
2519 watchpoints:
2520
2521 @table @code
2522 @item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2523 @kindex disable breakpoints
2524 @kindex disable
2525 @kindex dis
2526 Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
2527 listed. A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten. All
2528 options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
2529 case the breakpoint is enabled again later. You may abbreviate
2530 @code{disable} as @code{dis}.
2531
2532 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2533 @kindex enable breakpoints
2534 @kindex enable
2535 Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints). They
2536 become effective once again in stopping your program.
2537
2538 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{bnums}@dots{}
2539 Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily. @value{GDBN} disables any
2540 of these breakpoints immediately after stopping your program.
2541
2542 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{bnums}@dots{}
2543 Enable the specified breakpoints to work once, then die. @value{GDBN}
2544 deletes any of these breakpoints as soon as your program stops there.
2545 @end table
2546
2547 Save for a breakpoint set with @code{tbreak} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2548 ,Setting breakpoints}), breakpoints that you set are initially enabled;
2549 subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you use one of
2550 the commands above. (The command @code{until} can set and delete a
2551 breakpoint of its own, but it does not change the state of your other
2552 breakpoints; see @ref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and
2553 stepping}.)
2554
2555 @node Conditions
2556 @subsection Break conditions
2557 @cindex conditional breakpoints
2558 @cindex breakpoint conditions
2559
2560 @c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr? Context where wanted?
2561 @c in particular for a watchpoint?
2562 The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
2563 specified place. You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
2564 breakpoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
2565 programming language (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). A breakpoint with
2566 a condition evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it,
2567 and your program stops only if the condition is @emph{true}.
2568
2569 This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in that
2570 situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated---that is,
2571 when the condition is false. In C, if you want to test an assertion expressed
2572 by the condition @var{assert}, you should set the condition
2573 @samp{! @var{assert}} on the appropriate breakpoint.
2574
2575 Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
2576 since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow---but
2577 it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
2578 and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an interesting
2579 one.
2580
2581 Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions in
2582 your program. This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
2583 that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to
2584 format special data structures. The effects are completely predictable
2585 unless there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address. (In
2586 that case, @value{GDBN} might see the other breakpoint first and stop your
2587 program without checking the condition of this one.) Note that
2588 breakpoint commands are usually more convenient and flexible for the
2589 purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
2590 (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint command lists}).
2591
2592 Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
2593 @samp{if} in the arguments to the @code{break} command. @xref{Set
2594 Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}. They can also be changed at any time
2595 with the @code{condition} command. The @code{watch} command does not
2596 recognize the @code{if} keyword; @code{condition} is the only way to
2597 impose a further condition on a watchpoint.
2598
2599 @table @code
2600 @item condition @var{bnum} @var{expression}
2601 @kindex condition
2602 Specify @var{expression} as the break condition for breakpoint or
2603 watchpoint number @var{bnum}. After you set a condition, breakpoint
2604 @var{bnum} stops your program only if the value of @var{expression} is
2605 true (nonzero, in C). When you use @code{condition}, @value{GDBN}
2606 checks @var{expression} immediately for syntactic correctness, and to
2607 determine whether symbols in it have referents in the context of your
2608 breakpoint.
2609 @c FIXME so what does GDB do if there is no referent? Moreover, what
2610 @c about watchpoints?
2611 @value{GDBN} does
2612 not actually evaluate @var{expression} at the time the @code{condition}
2613 command is given, however. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
2614
2615 @item condition @var{bnum}
2616 Remove the condition from breakpoint number @var{bnum}. It becomes
2617 an ordinary unconditional breakpoint.
2618 @end table
2619
2620 @cindex ignore count (of breakpoint)
2621 A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
2622 breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times. This is so
2623 useful that there is a special way to do it, using the @dfn{ignore
2624 count} of the breakpoint. Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which
2625 is an integer. Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and
2626 therefore has no effect. But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose
2627 ignore count is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements
2628 the ignore count by one and continues. As a result, if the ignore count
2629 value is @var{n}, the breakpoint does not stop the next @var{n} times
2630 your program reaches it.
2631
2632 @table @code
2633 @item ignore @var{bnum} @var{count}
2634 @kindex ignore
2635 Set the ignore count of breakpoint number @var{bnum} to @var{count}.
2636 The next @var{count} times the breakpoint is reached, your program's
2637 execution does not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, @value{GDBN}
2638 takes no action.
2639
2640 To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify
2641 a count of zero.
2642
2643 When you use @code{continue} to resume execution of your program from a
2644 breakpoint, you can specify an ignore count directly as an argument to
2645 @code{continue}, rather than using @code{ignore}. @xref{Continuing and
2646 Stepping,,Continuing and stepping}.
2647
2648 If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the
2649 condition is not checked. Once the ignore count reaches zero,
2650 @value{GDBN} resumes checking the condition.
2651
2652 You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition such
2653 as @w{@samp{$foo-- <= 0}} using a debugger convenience variable that
2654 is decremented each time. @xref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
2655 variables}.
2656 @end table
2657
2658 @node Break Commands
2659 @subsection Breakpoint command lists
2660
2661 @cindex breakpoint commands
2662 You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint) a series of commands to
2663 execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint. For example, you
2664 might want to print the values of certain expressions, or enable other
2665 breakpoints.
2666
2667 @table @code
2668 @item commands @r{[}@var{bnum}@r{]}
2669 @itemx @dots{} @var{command-list} @dots{}
2670 @itemx end
2671 @kindex commands
2672 @kindex end
2673 Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number @var{bnum}. The commands
2674 themselves appear on the following lines. Type a line containing just
2675 @code{end} to terminate the commands.
2676
2677 To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type @code{commands} and
2678 follow it immediately with @code{end}; that is, give no commands.
2679
2680 With no @var{bnum} argument, @code{commands} refers to the last
2681 breakpoint or watchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most recently
2682 encountered).
2683 @end table
2684
2685 Pressing @key{RET} as a means of repeating the last @value{GDBN} command is
2686 disabled within a @var{command-list}.
2687
2688 You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again. Simply
2689 use the @code{continue} command, or @code{step}, or any other command
2690 that resumes execution.
2691
2692 Any other commands in the command list, after a command that resumes
2693 execution, are ignored. This is because any time you resume execution
2694 (even with a simple @code{next} or @code{step}), you may encounter
2695 another breakpoint---which could have its own command list, leading to
2696 ambiguities about which list to execute.
2697
2698 @kindex silent
2699 If the first command you specify in a command list is @code{silent}, the
2700 usual message about stopping at a breakpoint is not printed. This may
2701 be desirable for breakpoints that are to print a specific message and
2702 then continue. If none of the remaining commands print anything, you
2703 see no sign that the breakpoint was reached. @code{silent} is
2704 meaningful only at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.
2705
2706 The commands @code{echo}, @code{output}, and @code{printf} allow you to
2707 print precisely controlled output, and are often useful in silent
2708 breakpoints. @xref{Output, ,Commands for controlled output}.
2709
2710 For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print the
2711 value of @code{x} at entry to @code{foo} whenever @code{x} is positive.
2712
2713 @example
2714 break foo if x>0
2715 commands
2716 silent
2717 printf "x is %d\n",x
2718 cont
2719 end
2720 @end example
2721
2722 One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug so
2723 you can test for another. Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous line
2724 of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
2725 erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
2726 to any variables that need them. End with the @code{continue} command
2727 so that your program does not stop, and start with the @code{silent}
2728 command so that no output is produced. Here is an example:
2729
2730 @example
2731 break 403
2732 commands
2733 silent
2734 set x = y + 4
2735 cont
2736 end
2737 @end example
2738
2739 @ifclear CONLY
2740 @node Breakpoint Menus
2741 @subsection Breakpoint menus
2742 @cindex overloading
2743 @cindex symbol overloading
2744
2745 Some programming languages (notably C++) permit a single function name
2746 to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
2747 This is called @dfn{overloading}. When a function name is overloaded,
2748 @samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell @value{GDBN} where you want
2749 a breakpoint. If you realize this is a problem, you can use
2750 something like @samp{break @var{function}(@var{types})} to specify which
2751 particular version of the function you want. Otherwise, @value{GDBN} offers
2752 you a menu of numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and
2753 waits for your selection with the prompt @samp{>}. The first two
2754 options are always @samp{[0] cancel} and @samp{[1] all}. Typing @kbd{1}
2755 sets a breakpoint at each definition of @var{function}, and typing
2756 @kbd{0} aborts the @code{break} command without setting any new
2757 breakpoints.
2758
2759 For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
2760 breakpoint at the overloaded symbol @code{String::after}.
2761 We choose three particular definitions of that function name:
2762
2763 @c FIXME! This is likely to change to show arg type lists, at least
2764 @smallexample
2765 (@value{GDBP}) b String::after
2766 [0] cancel
2767 [1] all
2768 [2] file:String.cc; line number:867
2769 [3] file:String.cc; line number:860
2770 [4] file:String.cc; line number:875
2771 [5] file:String.cc; line number:853
2772 [6] file:String.cc; line number:846
2773 [7] file:String.cc; line number:735
2774 > 2 4 6
2775 Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
2776 Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
2777 Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
2778 Multiple breakpoints were set.
2779 Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted
2780 breakpoints.
2781 (@value{GDBP})
2782 @end smallexample
2783 @end ifclear
2784
2785 @ifclear BARETARGET
2786 @node Error in Breakpoints
2787 @subsection ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2788
2789 @c FIXME: "cannot insert breakpoints" error, v unclear.
2790 @c Q in pending mail to Gilmore. ---pesch@cygnus.com, 26mar91
2791 @c some light may be shed by looking at instances of
2792 @c ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT. But error message seems possible otherwise
2793 @c too. pesch, 20sep91
2794 Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
2795 any other process is running that program. In this situation,
2796 attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes @value{GDBN}
2797 to stop the other process.
2798
2799 When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:
2800
2801 @enumerate
2802 @item
2803 Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
2804
2805 @item
2806 Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new name.
2807 Resume @value{GDBN} and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify that @value{GDBN}
2808 should run your program under that name. Then start your program again.
2809
2810 @c FIXME: RMS commented here "Show example". Maybe when someone
2811 @c explains the first FIXME: in this section...
2812
2813 @item
2814 Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using the
2815 linker option @samp{-N}. The operating system limitation may not apply
2816 to nonsharable executables.
2817 @end enumerate
2818 @end ifclear
2819
2820 @node Continuing and Stepping
2821 @section Continuing and stepping
2822
2823 @cindex stepping
2824 @cindex continuing
2825 @cindex resuming execution
2826 @dfn{Continuing} means resuming program execution until your program
2827 completes normally. In contrast, @dfn{stepping} means executing just
2828 one more ``step'' of your program, where ``step'' may mean either one
2829 line of source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what
2830 particular command you use). Either when continuing
2831 or when stepping, your program may stop even sooner, due to
2832 @ifset BARETARGET
2833 a breakpoint.
2834 @end ifset
2835 @ifclear BARETARGET
2836 a breakpoint or a signal. (If due to a signal, you may want to use
2837 @code{handle}, or use @samp{signal 0} to resume execution.
2838 @xref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
2839 @end ifclear
2840
2841 @table @code
2842 @item continue @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2843 @itemx c @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2844 @itemx fg @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2845 @kindex continue
2846 @kindex c
2847 @kindex fg
2848 Resume program execution, at the address where your program last stopped;
2849 any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed. The optional argument
2850 @var{ignore-count} allows you to specify a further number of times to
2851 ignore a breakpoint at this location; its effect is like that of
2852 @code{ignore} (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2853
2854 The argument @var{ignore-count} is meaningful only when your program
2855 stopped due to a breakpoint. At other times, the argument to
2856 @code{continue} is ignored.
2857
2858 The synonyms @code{c} and @code{fg} are provided purely for convenience,
2859 and have exactly the same behavior as @code{continue}.
2860 @end table
2861
2862 To resume execution at a different place, you can use @code{return}
2863 (@pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}) to go back to the
2864 calling function; or @code{jump} (@pxref{Jumping, ,Continuing at a
2865 different address}) to go to an arbitrary location in your program.
2866
2867 A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint
2868 @ifclear CONLY
2869 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions})
2870 @end ifclear
2871 @ifset CONLY
2872 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints and watchpoints})
2873 @end ifset
2874 at the
2875 beginning of the function or the section of your program where a
2876 problem is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that
2877 breakpoint, and then step through the suspect area, examining the
2878 variables that are interesting, until you see the problem happen.
2879
2880 @table @code
2881 @item step
2882 @kindex step
2883 @kindex s
2884 Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
2885 line, then stop it and return control to @value{GDBN}. This command is
2886 abbreviated @code{s}.
2887
2888 @quotation
2889 @c "without debugging information" is imprecise; actually "without line
2890 @c numbers in the debugging information". (gcc -g1 has debugging info but
2891 @c not line numbers). But it seems complex to try to make that
2892 @c distinction here.
2893 @emph{Warning:} If you use the @code{step} command while control is
2894 within a function that was compiled without debugging information,
2895 execution proceeds until control reaches a function that does have
2896 debugging information. Likewise, it will not step into a function which
2897 is compiled without debugging information. To step through functions
2898 without debugging information, use the @code{stepi} command, described
2899 below.
2900 @end quotation
2901
2902 @item step @var{count}
2903 Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times. If a
2904 breakpoint is reached,
2905 @ifclear BARETARGET
2906 or a signal not related to stepping occurs before @var{count} steps,
2907 @end ifclear
2908 stepping stops right away.
2909
2910 @item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2911 @kindex next
2912 @kindex n
2913 Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
2914 Similar to @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the line
2915 of code are executed without stopping. Execution stops when control
2916 reaches a different line of code at the stack level which was executing
2917 when the @code{next} command was given. This command is abbreviated
2918 @code{n}.
2919
2920 An argument @var{count} is a repeat count, as for @code{step}.
2921
2922 @code{next} within a function that lacks debugging information acts like
2923 @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the code of the
2924 function are executed without stopping.
2925
2926 @item finish
2927 @kindex finish
2928 Continue running until just after function in the selected stack frame
2929 returns. Print the returned value (if any).
2930
2931 Contrast this with the @code{return} command (@pxref{Returning,
2932 ,Returning from a function}).
2933
2934 @item until
2935 @kindex until
2936 @itemx u
2937 @kindex u
2938 Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
2939 current stack frame, is reached. This command is used to avoid single
2940 stepping through a loop more than once. It is like the @code{next}
2941 command, except that when @code{until} encounters a jump, it
2942 automatically continues execution until the program counter is greater
2943 than the address of the jump.
2944
2945 This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single stepping
2946 though it, @code{until} makes your program continue execution until it
2947 exits the loop. In contrast, a @code{next} command at the end of a loop
2948 simply steps back to the beginning of the loop, which forces you to step
2949 through the next iteration.
2950
2951 @code{until} always stops your program if it attempts to exit the current
2952 stack frame.
2953
2954 @code{until} may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
2955 of machine code does not match the order of the source lines. For
2956 example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the @code{f}
2957 (@code{frame}) command shows that execution is stopped at line
2958 @code{206}; yet when we use @code{until}, we get to line @code{195}:
2959
2960 @example
2961 (@value{GDBP}) f
2962 #0 main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
2963 206 expand_input();
2964 (@value{GDBP}) until
2965 195 for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) @{
2966 @end example
2967
2968 This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
2969 generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than the
2970 start, of the loop---even though the test in a C @code{for}-loop is
2971 written before the body of the loop. The @code{until} command appeared
2972 to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
2973 expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
2974 statement---not in terms of the actual machine code.
2975
2976 @code{until} with no argument works by means of single
2977 instruction stepping, and hence is slower than @code{until} with an
2978 argument.
2979
2980 @item until @var{location}
2981 @itemx u @var{location}
2982 Continue running your program until either the specified location is
2983 reached, or the current stack frame returns. @var{location} is any of
2984 the forms of argument acceptable to @code{break} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2985 ,Setting breakpoints}). This form of the command uses breakpoints,
2986 and hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument.
2987
2988 @item stepi
2989 @itemx si
2990 @kindex stepi
2991 @kindex si
2992 Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
2993
2994 It is often useful to do @samp{display/i $pc} when stepping by machine
2995 instructions. This makes @value{GDBN} automatically display the next
2996 instruction to be executed, each time your program stops. @xref{Auto
2997 Display,, Automatic display}.
2998
2999 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{step}.
3000
3001 @need 750
3002 @item nexti
3003 @itemx ni
3004 @kindex nexti
3005 @kindex ni
3006 Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
3007 proceed until the function returns.
3008
3009 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{next}.
3010 @end table
3011
3012 @ifset POSIX
3013 @node Signals
3014 @section Signals
3015 @cindex signals
3016
3017 A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program. The
3018 operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
3019 kind a name and a number. For example, in Unix @code{SIGINT} is the
3020 signal a program gets when you type an interrupt (often @kbd{C-c});
3021 @code{SIGSEGV} is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
3022 memory far away from all the areas in use; @code{SIGALRM} occurs when
3023 the alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
3024 requested an alarm).
3025
3026 @cindex fatal signals
3027 Some signals, including @code{SIGALRM}, are a normal part of the
3028 functioning of your program. Others, such as @code{SIGSEGV}, indicate
3029 errors; these signals are @dfn{fatal} (kill your program immediately) if the
3030 program has not specified in advance some other way to handle the signal.
3031 @code{SIGINT} does not indicate an error in your program, but it is normally
3032 fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt: to kill the program.
3033
3034 @value{GDBN} has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
3035 program. You can tell @value{GDBN} in advance what to do for each kind of
3036 signal.
3037
3038 @cindex handling signals
3039 Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to ignore non-erroneous signals like @code{SIGALRM}
3040 (so as not to interfere with their role in the functioning of your program)
3041 but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
3042 You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
3043
3044 @table @code
3045 @item info signals
3046 @kindex info signals
3047 Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how @value{GDBN} has been told to
3048 handle each one. You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
3049 the defined types of signals.
3050
3051 @item handle @var{signal} @var{keywords}@dots{}
3052 @kindex handle
3053 Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the
3054 number of a signal or its name (with or without the @samp{SIG} at the
3055 beginning). The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
3056 @end table
3057
3058 @c @group
3059 The keywords allowed by the @code{handle} command can be abbreviated.
3060 Their full names are:
3061
3062 @table @code
3063 @item nostop
3064 @value{GDBN} should not stop your program when this signal happens. It may
3065 still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.
3066
3067 @item stop
3068 @value{GDBN} should stop your program when this signal happens. This implies
3069 the @code{print} keyword as well.
3070
3071 @item print
3072 @value{GDBN} should print a message when this signal happens.
3073
3074 @item noprint
3075 @value{GDBN} should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all. This
3076 implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
3077
3078 @item pass
3079 @value{GDBN} should allow your program to see this signal; your program
3080 can handle the signal, or else it may terminate if the signal is fatal
3081 and not handled.
3082
3083 @item nopass
3084 @value{GDBN} should not allow your program to see this signal.
3085 @end table
3086 @c @end group
3087
3088 When a signal stops your program, the signal is not visible until you
3089 continue. Your program sees the signal then, if @code{pass} is in
3090 effect for the signal in question @emph{at that time}. In other words,
3091 after @value{GDBN} reports a signal, you can use the @code{handle}
3092 command with @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether your
3093 program sees that signal when you continue.
3094
3095 You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
3096 seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
3097 or to give it any signal at any time. For example, if your program stopped
3098 due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store correct
3099 values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see more
3100 execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
3101 a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal. To prevent this,
3102 you can continue with @samp{signal 0}. @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
3103 program a signal}.
3104 @end ifset
3105
3106 @ifclear BARETARGET
3107 @node Thread Stops
3108 @section Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
3109
3110 When your program has multiple threads (@pxref{Threads,, Debugging
3111 programs with multiple threads}), you can choose whether to set
3112 breakpoints on all threads, or on a particular thread.
3113
3114 @table @code
3115 @cindex breakpoints and threads
3116 @cindex thread breakpoints
3117 @kindex break @dots{} thread @var{threadno}
3118 @item break @var{linespec} thread @var{threadno}
3119 @itemx break @var{linespec} thread @var{threadno} if @dots{}
3120 Use the qualifier @samp{thread @var{threadno}} with a breakpoint command
3121 to specify that you only want @value{GDBN} to stop the program when a
3122 particular thread reaches this breakpoint. @var{threadno} is one of the
3123 numeric thread identifiers assigned by @value{GDBN}, shown in the first
3124 column of the @samp{info threads} display.
3125
3126 If you do not specify @samp{thread @var{threadno}} when you set a
3127 breakpoint, the breakpoint applies to @emph{all} threads of your
3128 program.
3129
3130 You can use the @code{thread} qualifier on conditional breakpoints as
3131 well; in this case, place @samp{thread @var{threadno}} before the
3132 breakpoint condition, like this:
3133
3134 @smallexample
3135 (gdb) break frik.c:13 thread 28 if bartab > lim
3136 @end smallexample
3137 @end table
3138
3139 @cindex stopped threads
3140 @cindex threads, stopped
3141 Whenever your program stops under @value{GDBN} for any reason,
3142 @emph{all} threads of execution stop, not just the current thread. This
3143 allows you to examine the overall state of the program, including
3144 switching between threads, without worrying that things may change
3145 underfoot.
3146
3147 @cindex continuing threads
3148 @cindex threads, continuing
3149 Conversely, whenever you restart the program, @emph{all} threads start
3150 executing. @emph{This is true even when single-stepping} with commands
3151 like @code{step} or @code{next}.
3152
3153 In particular, @value{GDBN} cannot single-step all threads in lockstep.
3154 Since thread scheduling is up to your debugging target's operating
3155 system (not controlled by @value{GDBN}), other threads may
3156 execute more than one statement while the current thread completes a
3157 single step. Moreover, in general other threads stop in the middle of a
3158 statement, rather than at a clean statement boundary, when the program
3159 stops.
3160
3161 You might even find your program stopped in another thread after
3162 continuing or even single-stepping. This happens whenever some other
3163 thread runs into a breakpoint, a signal, or an exception before the
3164 first thread completes whatever you requested.
3165 @end ifclear
3166
3167 @node Stack
3168 @chapter Examining the Stack
3169
3170 When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is where it
3171 stopped and how it got there.
3172
3173 @cindex call stack
3174 Each time your program performs a function call, the information about
3175 where in your program the call was made from is saved in a block of data
3176 called a @dfn{stack frame}. The frame also contains the arguments of the
3177 call and the local variables of the function that was called. All the
3178 stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
3179 stack}.
3180
3181 When your program stops, the @value{GDBN} commands for examining the
3182 stack allow you to see all of this information.
3183
3184 @cindex selected frame
3185 One of the stack frames is @dfn{selected} by @value{GDBN} and many
3186 @value{GDBN} commands refer implicitly to the selected frame. In
3187 particular, whenever you ask @value{GDBN} for the value of a variable in
3188 your program, the value is found in the selected frame. There are
3189 special @value{GDBN} commands to select whichever frame you are
3190 interested in.
3191
3192 When your program stops, @value{GDBN} automatically selects the
3193 currently executing frame and describes it briefly as the @code{frame}
3194 command does (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}).
3195
3196 @menu
3197 * Frames:: Stack frames
3198 * Backtrace:: Backtraces
3199 * Selection:: Selecting a frame
3200 * Frame Info:: Information on a frame
3201 @ifset MIPS
3202 * MIPS Stack:: MIPS machines and the function stack
3203 @end ifset
3204 @end menu
3205
3206 @node Frames
3207 @section Stack frames
3208
3209 @cindex frame
3210 @cindex stack frame
3211 The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called @dfn{stack
3212 frames}, or @dfn{frames} for short; each frame is the data associated
3213 with one call to one function. The frame contains the arguments given
3214 to the function, the function's local variables, and the address at
3215 which the function is executing.
3216
3217 @cindex initial frame
3218 @cindex outermost frame
3219 @cindex innermost frame
3220 When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of the
3221 function @code{main}. This is called the @dfn{initial} frame or the
3222 @dfn{outermost} frame. Each time a function is called, a new frame is
3223 made. Each time a function returns, the frame for that function invocation
3224 is eliminated. If a function is recursive, there can be many frames for
3225 the same function. The frame for the function in which execution is
3226 actually occurring is called the @dfn{innermost} frame. This is the most
3227 recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.
3228
3229 @cindex frame pointer
3230 Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses. A
3231 stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own address; each
3232 kind of computer has a convention for choosing one of those bytes whose
3233 address serves as the address of the frame. Usually this address is kept
3234 in a register called the @dfn{frame pointer register} while execution is
3235 going on in that frame.
3236
3237 @cindex frame number
3238 @value{GDBN} assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with
3239 zero for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it,
3240 and so on upward. These numbers do not really exist in your program;
3241 they are assigned by @value{GDBN} to give you a way of designating stack
3242 frames in @value{GDBN} commands.
3243
3244 @c below produces an acceptable overful hbox. --mew 13aug1993
3245 @cindex frameless execution
3246 Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they operate
3247 without stack frames. (For example, the @code{@value{GCC}} option
3248 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} generates functions without a frame.)
3249 This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
3250 the frame setup time. @value{GDBN} has limited facilities for dealing
3251 with these function invocations. If the innermost function invocation
3252 has no stack frame, @value{GDBN} nevertheless regards it as though
3253 it had a separate frame, which is numbered zero as usual, allowing
3254 correct tracing of the function call chain. However, @value{GDBN} has
3255 no provision for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.
3256
3257 @node Backtrace
3258 @section Backtraces
3259
3260 A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is. It shows one
3261 line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently executing
3262 frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and on up the
3263 stack.
3264
3265 @table @code
3266 @item backtrace
3267 @itemx bt
3268 @kindex backtrace
3269 @kindex bt
3270 Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
3271 frames in the stack.
3272
3273 You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system interrupt
3274 character, normally @kbd{C-c}.
3275
3276 @item backtrace @var{n}
3277 @itemx bt @var{n}
3278 Similar, but print only the innermost @var{n} frames.
3279
3280 @item backtrace -@var{n}
3281 @itemx bt -@var{n}
3282 Similar, but print only the outermost @var{n} frames.
3283 @end table
3284
3285 @kindex where
3286 @kindex info stack
3287 @kindex info s
3288 The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
3289 are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
3290
3291 Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function name.
3292 The program counter value is also shown---unless you use @code{set
3293 print address off}. The backtrace also shows the source file name and
3294 line number, as well as the arguments to the function. The program
3295 counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
3296 line number.
3297
3298 Here is an example of a backtrace. It was made with the command
3299 @samp{bt 3}, so it shows the innermost three frames.
3300
3301 @smallexample
3302 @group
3303 #0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
3304 at builtin.c:993
3305 #1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
3306 #2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
3307 at macro.c:71
3308 (More stack frames follow...)
3309 @end group
3310 @end smallexample
3311
3312 @noindent
3313 The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter
3314 value, indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the
3315 code for line @code{993} of @code{builtin.c}.
3316
3317 @node Selection
3318 @section Selecting a frame
3319
3320 Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program work on
3321 whichever stack frame is selected at the moment. Here are the commands for
3322 selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a brief description
3323 of the stack frame just selected.
3324
3325 @table @code
3326 @item frame @var{n}
3327 @itemx f @var{n}
3328 @kindex frame
3329 @kindex f
3330 Select frame number @var{n}. Recall that frame zero is the innermost
3331 (currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
3332 innermost one, and so on. The highest-numbered frame is the one for
3333 @code{main}.
3334
3335 @item frame @var{addr}
3336 @itemx f @var{addr}
3337 Select the frame at address @var{addr}. This is useful mainly if the
3338 chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
3339 impossible for @value{GDBN} to assign numbers properly to all frames. In
3340 addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks and
3341 switches between them.
3342
3343 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
3344 On the SPARC architecture, @code{frame} needs two addresses to
3345 select an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.
3346
3347 On the MIPS and Alpha architecture, it needs two addresses: a stack
3348 pointer and a program counter.
3349
3350 On the 29k architecture, it needs three addresses: a register stack
3351 pointer, a program counter, and a memory stack pointer.
3352 @c note to future updaters: this is conditioned on a flag
3353 @c SETUP_ARBITRARY_FRAME in the tm-*.h files. The above is up to date
3354 @c as of 27 Jan 1994.
3355 @end ifclear
3356
3357 @item up @var{n}
3358 @kindex up
3359 Move @var{n} frames up the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3360 advances toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
3361 that have existed longer. @var{n} defaults to one.
3362
3363 @item down @var{n}
3364 @kindex down
3365 @kindex do
3366 Move @var{n} frames down the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3367 advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
3368 that were created more recently. @var{n} defaults to one. You may
3369 abbreviate @code{down} as @code{do}.
3370 @end table
3371
3372 All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
3373 frame. The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
3374 arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
3375 frame. The second line shows the text of that source line.
3376
3377 @need 1000
3378 For example:
3379
3380 @smallexample
3381 @group
3382 (@value{GDBP}) up
3383 #1 0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
3384 at env.c:10
3385 10 read_input_file (argv[i]);
3386 @end group
3387 @end smallexample
3388
3389 After such a printout, the @code{list} command with no arguments
3390 prints ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.
3391 @xref{List, ,Printing source lines}.
3392
3393 @table @code
3394 @item up-silently @var{n}
3395 @itemx down-silently @var{n}
3396 @kindex down-silently
3397 @kindex up-silently
3398 These two commands are variants of @code{up} and @code{down},
3399 respectively; they differ in that they do their work silently, without
3400 causing display of the new frame. They are intended primarily for use
3401 in @value{GDBN} command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
3402 distracting.
3403 @end table
3404
3405 @node Frame Info
3406 @section Information about a frame
3407
3408 There are several other commands to print information about the selected
3409 stack frame.
3410
3411 @table @code
3412 @item frame
3413 @itemx f
3414 When used without any argument, this command does not change which
3415 frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
3416 selected stack frame. It can be abbreviated @code{f}. With an
3417 argument, this command is used to select a stack frame.
3418 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3419
3420 @item info frame
3421 @itemx info f
3422 @kindex info frame
3423 @kindex info f
3424 This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
3425 including the address of the frame, the addresses of the next frame down
3426 (called by this frame) and the next frame up (caller of this frame), the
3427 language that the source code corresponding to this frame was written in,
3428 the address of the frame's arguments, the program counter saved in it
3429 (the address of execution in the caller frame), and which registers
3430 were saved in the frame. The verbose description is useful when
3431 something has gone wrong that has made the stack format fail to fit
3432 the usual conventions.
3433
3434 @item info frame @var{addr}
3435 @itemx info f @var{addr}
3436 Print a verbose description of the frame at address @var{addr}, without
3437 selecting that frame. The selected frame remains unchanged by this
3438 command. This requires the same kind of address (more than one for some
3439 architectures) that you specify in the @code{frame} command.
3440 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3441
3442 @item info args
3443 @kindex info args
3444 Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.
3445
3446 @item info locals
3447 @kindex info locals
3448 Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
3449 line. These are all variables (declared either static or automatic)
3450 accessible at the point of execution of the selected frame.
3451
3452 @ifclear CONLY
3453 @item info catch
3454 @kindex info catch
3455 @cindex catch exceptions
3456 @cindex exception handlers
3457 Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
3458 current stack frame at the current point of execution. To see other
3459 exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the @code{up},
3460 @code{down}, or @code{frame} commands); then type @code{info catch}.
3461 @xref{Exception Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
3462 @end ifclear
3463 @end table
3464
3465 @ifset MIPS
3466 @node MIPS Stack
3467 @section MIPS machines and the function stack
3468
3469 @cindex stack on MIPS
3470 @cindex MIPS stack
3471 MIPS based computers use an unusual stack frame, which sometimes
3472 requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to find the
3473 beginning of a function.
3474
3475 @cindex response time, MIPS debugging
3476 To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
3477 @value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
3478 you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
3479 commands:
3480 @c FIXME! So what happens when GDB does *not* find the beginning of a
3481 @c function?
3482
3483 @cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (MIPS)
3484 @table @code
3485 @item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
3486 Restrict @value{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its search
3487 for the beginning of a function. A value of @code{0} (the default)
3488 means there is no limit.
3489
3490 @item show heuristic-fence-post
3491 Display the current limit.
3492 @end table
3493
3494 @noindent
3495 These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
3496 for debugging programs on MIPS processors.
3497 @end ifset
3498
3499 @node Source
3500 @chapter Examining Source Files
3501
3502 @value{GDBN} can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
3503 information recorded in the program tells @value{GDBN} what source files were
3504 used to build it. When your program stops, @value{GDBN} spontaneously prints
3505 the line where it stopped. Likewise, when you select a stack frame
3506 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}), @value{GDBN} prints the line where
3507 execution in that frame has stopped. You can print other portions of
3508 source files by explicit command.
3509
3510 @ifclear DOSHOST
3511 If you use @value{GDBN} through its GNU Emacs interface, you may prefer to use
3512 Emacs facilities to view source; @pxref{Emacs, ,Using @value{GDBN} under GNU
3513 Emacs}.
3514 @end ifclear
3515
3516 @menu
3517 * List:: Printing source lines
3518 @ifclear DOSHOST
3519 * Search:: Searching source files
3520 @end ifclear
3521
3522 * Source Path:: Specifying source directories
3523 * Machine Code:: Source and machine code
3524 @end menu
3525
3526 @node List
3527 @section Printing source lines
3528
3529 @kindex list
3530 @kindex l
3531 To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
3532 (abbreviated @code{l}). There are several ways to specify what part
3533 of the file you want to print.
3534
3535 Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
3536
3537 @table @code
3538 @item list @var{linenum}
3539 Print lines centered around line number @var{linenum} in the
3540 current source file.
3541
3542 @item list @var{function}
3543 Print lines centered around the beginning of function
3544 @var{function}.
3545
3546 @item list
3547 Print more lines. If the last lines printed were printed with a
3548 @code{list} command, this prints lines following the last lines
3549 printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line printed
3550 as part of displaying a stack frame (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the
3551 Stack}), this prints lines centered around that line.
3552
3553 @item list -
3554 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3555 @end table
3556
3557 By default, @value{GDBN} prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
3558 the @code{list} command. You can change this using @code{set listsize}:
3559
3560 @table @code
3561 @item set listsize @var{count}
3562 @kindex set listsize
3563 Make the @code{list} command display @var{count} source lines (unless
3564 the @code{list} argument explicitly specifies some other number).
3565
3566 @item show listsize
3567 @kindex show listsize
3568 Display the number of lines that @code{list} prints.
3569 @end table
3570
3571 Repeating a @code{list} command with @key{RET} discards the argument,
3572 so it is equivalent to typing just @code{list}. This is more useful
3573 than listing the same lines again. An exception is made for an
3574 argument of @samp{-}; that argument is preserved in repetition so that
3575 each repetition moves up in the source file.
3576
3577 @cindex linespec
3578 In general, the @code{list} command expects you to supply zero, one or two
3579 @dfn{linespecs}. Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways
3580 of writing them but the effect is always to specify some source line.
3581 Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for @code{list}:
3582
3583 @table @code
3584 @item list @var{linespec}
3585 Print lines centered around the line specified by @var{linespec}.
3586
3587 @item list @var{first},@var{last}
3588 Print lines from @var{first} to @var{last}. Both arguments are
3589 linespecs.
3590
3591 @item list ,@var{last}
3592 Print lines ending with @var{last}.
3593
3594 @item list @var{first},
3595 Print lines starting with @var{first}.
3596
3597 @item list +
3598 Print lines just after the lines last printed.
3599
3600 @item list -
3601 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3602
3603 @item list
3604 As described in the preceding table.
3605 @end table
3606
3607 Here are the ways of specifying a single source line---all the
3608 kinds of linespec.
3609
3610 @table @code
3611 @item @var{number}
3612 Specifies line @var{number} of the current source file.
3613 When a @code{list} command has two linespecs, this refers to
3614 the same source file as the first linespec.
3615
3616 @item +@var{offset}
3617 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines after the last line printed.
3618 When used as the second linespec in a @code{list} command that has
3619 two, this specifies the line @var{offset} lines down from the
3620 first linespec.
3621
3622 @item -@var{offset}
3623 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines before the last line printed.
3624
3625 @item @var{filename}:@var{number}
3626 Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
3627
3628 @item @var{function}
3629 @c FIXME: "of the open-brace" is C-centric. When we add other langs...
3630 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3631 function @var{function}.
3632
3633 @item @var{filename}:@var{function}
3634 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3635 function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}. You only need the
3636 file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
3637 identically named functions in different source files.
3638
3639 @item *@var{address}
3640 Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
3641 @var{address} may be any expression.
3642 @end table
3643
3644 @ifclear DOSHOST
3645 @node Search
3646 @section Searching source files
3647 @cindex searching
3648 @kindex reverse-search
3649
3650 There are two commands for searching through the current source file for a
3651 regular expression.
3652
3653 @table @code
3654 @item forward-search @var{regexp}
3655 @itemx search @var{regexp}
3656 @kindex search
3657 @kindex forward-search
3658 The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
3659 starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
3660 @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use
3661 synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
3662 @code{fo}.
3663
3664 @item reverse-search @var{regexp}
3665 The command @samp{reverse-search @var{regexp}} checks each line, starting
3666 with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a match
3667 for @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can abbreviate
3668 this command as @code{rev}.
3669 @end table
3670 @end ifclear
3671
3672 @node Source Path
3673 @section Specifying source directories
3674
3675 @cindex source path
3676 @cindex directories for source files
3677 Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the source
3678 files from which they were compiled, just the names. Even when they do,
3679 the directories could be moved between the compilation and your debugging
3680 session. @value{GDBN} has a list of directories to search for source files;
3681 this is called the @dfn{source path}. Each time @value{GDBN} wants a source file,
3682 it tries all the directories in the list, in the order they are present
3683 in the list, until it finds a file with the desired name. Note that
3684 the executable search path is @emph{not} used for this purpose. Neither is
3685 the current working directory, unless it happens to be in the source
3686 path.
3687
3688 If @value{GDBN} cannot find a source file in the source path, and the
3689 object program records a directory, @value{GDBN} tries that directory
3690 too. If the source path is empty, and there is no record of the
3691 compilation directory, @value{GDBN} looks in the current directory as a
3692 last resort.
3693
3694 Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, @value{GDBN} clears out
3695 any information it has cached about where source files are found and where
3696 each line is in the file.
3697
3698 @kindex directory
3699 When you start @value{GDBN}, its source path is empty.
3700 To add other directories, use the @code{directory} command.
3701
3702 @table @code
3703 @item directory @var{dirname} @dots{}
3704 Add directory @var{dirname} to the front of the source path. Several
3705 directory names may be given to this command, separated by @samp{:} or
3706 whitespace. You may specify a directory that is already in the source
3707 path; this moves it forward, so @value{GDBN} searches it sooner.
3708
3709 @kindex cdir
3710 @kindex cwd
3711 @kindex $cdir
3712 @kindex $cwd
3713 @cindex compilation directory
3714 @cindex current directory
3715 @cindex working directory
3716 @cindex directory, current
3717 @cindex directory, compilation
3718 You can use the string @samp{$cdir} to refer to the compilation
3719 directory (if one is recorded), and @samp{$cwd} to refer to the current
3720 working directory. @samp{$cwd} is not the same as @samp{.}---the former
3721 tracks the current working directory as it changes during your @value{GDBN}
3722 session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
3723 directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.
3724
3725 @item directory
3726 Reset the source path to empty again. This requires confirmation.
3727
3728 @c RET-repeat for @code{directory} is explicitly disabled, but since
3729 @c repeating it would be a no-op we do not say that. (thanks to RMS)
3730
3731 @item show directories
3732 @kindex show directories
3733 Print the source path: show which directories it contains.
3734 @end table
3735
3736 If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer of
3737 interest, @value{GDBN} may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
3738 versions of source. You can correct the situation as follows:
3739
3740 @enumerate
3741 @item
3742 Use @code{directory} with no argument to reset the source path to empty.
3743
3744 @item
3745 Use @code{directory} with suitable arguments to reinstall the
3746 directories you want in the source path. You can add all the
3747 directories in one command.
3748 @end enumerate
3749
3750 @node Machine Code
3751 @section Source and machine code
3752
3753 You can use the command @code{info line} to map source lines to program
3754 addresses (and vice versa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
3755 a range of addresses as machine instructions.
3756
3757 @table @code
3758 @item info line @var{linespec}
3759 @kindex info line
3760 Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
3761 source line @var{linespec}. You can specify source lines in any of
3762 the ways understood by the @code{list} command (@pxref{List, ,Printing
3763 source lines}).
3764 @end table
3765
3766 For example, we can use @code{info line} to discover the location of
3767 the object code for the first line of function
3768 @code{m4_changequote}:
3769
3770 @smallexample
3771 (@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changecom
3772 Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
3773 @end smallexample
3774
3775 @noindent
3776 We can also inquire (using @code{*@var{addr}} as the form for
3777 @var{linespec}) what source line covers a particular address:
3778 @smallexample
3779 (@value{GDBP}) info line *0x63ff
3780 Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.
3781 @end smallexample
3782
3783 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
3784 After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
3785 is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
3786 sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
3787 ,Examining memory}). Also, this address is saved as the value of the
3788 convenience variable @code{$_} (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3789 variables}).
3790
3791 @table @code
3792 @kindex disassemble
3793 @item disassemble
3794 @cindex assembly instructions
3795 @cindex instructions, assembly
3796 @cindex machine instructions
3797 @cindex listing machine instructions
3798 This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
3799 instructions. The default memory range is the function surrounding the
3800 program counter of the selected frame. A single argument to this
3801 command is a program counter value; @value{GDBN} dumps the function
3802 surrounding this value. Two arguments specify a range of addresses
3803 (first inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.
3804 @end table
3805
3806 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
3807 We can use @code{disassemble} to inspect the object code
3808 range shown in the last @code{info line} example (the example
3809 shows SPARC machine instructions):
3810
3811
3812 @smallexample
3813 (@value{GDBP}) disas 0x63e4 0x6404
3814 Dump of assembler code from 0x63e4 to 0x6404:
3815 0x63e4 <builtin_init+5340>: ble 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>
3816 0x63e8 <builtin_init+5344>: sethi %hi(0x4c00), %o0
3817 0x63ec <builtin_init+5348>: ld [%i1+4], %o0
3818 0x63f0 <builtin_init+5352>: b 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>
3819 0x63f4 <builtin_init+5356>: ld [%o0+4], %o0
3820 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>: or %o0, 0x1a4, %o0
3821 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>: call 0x9288 <path_search>
3822 0x6400 <builtin_init+5368>: nop
3823 End of assembler dump.
3824 @end smallexample
3825 @end ifclear
3826
3827 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
3828 For example, here is the beginning of the output for the
3829 disassembly of a function @code{fact}:
3830
3831
3832 @smallexample
3833 (@value{GDBP}) disas fact
3834 Dump of assembler code for function fact:
3835 to 0x808c:
3836 0x802c <fact>: 6d f2 mov.w r2,@@-r7
3837 0x802e <fact+2>: 6d f3 mov.w r3,@@-r7
3838 0x8030 <fact+4>: 6d f6 mov.w r6,@@-r7
3839 0x8032 <fact+6>: 0d 76 mov.w r7,r6
3840 0x8034 <fact+8>: 6f 70 00 08 mov.w @@(0x8,r7),r0
3841 0x8038 <fact+12> 19 11 sub.w r1,r1
3842 .
3843 .
3844 .
3845 @end smallexample
3846 @end ifset
3847
3848 @node Data
3849 @chapter Examining Data
3850
3851 @cindex printing data
3852 @cindex examining data
3853 @kindex print
3854 @kindex inspect
3855 @c "inspect" is not quite a synonym if you are using Epoch, which we do not
3856 @c document because it is nonstandard... Under Epoch it displays in a
3857 @c different window or something like that.
3858 The usual way to examine data in your program is with the @code{print}
3859 command (abbreviated @code{p}), or its synonym @code{inspect}.
3860 @ifclear CONLY
3861 It evaluates and prints the value of an expression of the language your
3862 program is written in (@pxref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3863 Languages}).
3864 @end ifclear
3865
3866 @table @code
3867 @item print @var{exp}
3868 @itemx print /@var{f} @var{exp}
3869 @var{exp} is an expression (in the source language). By default the
3870 value of @var{exp} is printed in a format appropriate to its data type;
3871 you can choose a different format by specifying @samp{/@var{f}}, where
3872 @var{f} is a letter specifying the format; @pxref{Output Formats,,Output
3873 formats}.
3874
3875 @item print
3876 @itemx print /@var{f}
3877 If you omit @var{exp}, @value{GDBN} displays the last value again (from the
3878 @dfn{value history}; @pxref{Value History, ,Value history}). This allows you to
3879 conveniently inspect the same value in an alternative format.
3880 @end table
3881
3882 A more low-level way of examining data is with the @code{x} command.
3883 It examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
3884 specified format. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
3885
3886 If you are interested in information about types, or about how the fields
3887 of a struct
3888 @ifclear CONLY
3889 or class
3890 @end ifclear
3891 are declared, use the @code{ptype @var{exp}}
3892 command rather than @code{print}. @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
3893
3894 @menu
3895 * Expressions:: Expressions
3896 * Variables:: Program variables
3897 * Arrays:: Artificial arrays
3898 * Output Formats:: Output formats
3899 * Memory:: Examining memory
3900 * Auto Display:: Automatic display
3901 * Print Settings:: Print settings
3902 * Value History:: Value history
3903 * Convenience Vars:: Convenience variables
3904 * Registers:: Registers
3905 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
3906 * Floating Point Hardware:: Floating point hardware
3907 @end ifclear
3908 @end menu
3909
3910 @node Expressions
3911 @section Expressions
3912
3913 @cindex expressions
3914 @code{print} and many other @value{GDBN} commands accept an expression and
3915 compute its value. Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined
3916 by the programming language you are using is valid in an expression in
3917 @value{GDBN}. This includes conditional expressions, function calls, casts
3918 and string constants. It unfortunately does not include symbols defined
3919 by preprocessor @code{#define} commands.
3920
3921 @ifclear CONLY
3922 Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
3923 this manual are in C. @xref{Languages, , Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3924 Languages}, for information on how to use expressions in other
3925 languages.
3926
3927 In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in @value{GDBN}
3928 expressions regardless of your programming language.
3929
3930 Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
3931 useful to cast a number into a pointer so as to examine a structure
3932 at that address in memory.
3933 @c FIXME: casts supported---Mod2 true?
3934 @end ifclear
3935
3936 @value{GDBN} supports these operators in addition to those of programming
3937 languages:
3938
3939 @table @code
3940 @item @@
3941 @samp{@@} is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
3942 @xref{Arrays, ,Artificial arrays}, for more information.
3943
3944 @item ::
3945 @samp{::} allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
3946 function where it is defined. @xref{Variables, ,Program variables}.
3947
3948 @item @{@var{type}@} @var{addr}
3949 @cindex @{@var{type}@}
3950 @cindex type casting memory
3951 @cindex memory, viewing as typed object
3952 @cindex casts, to view memory
3953 Refers to an object of type @var{type} stored at address @var{addr} in
3954 memory. @var{addr} may be any expression whose value is an integer or
3955 pointer (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
3956 a cast). This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of data is
3957 normally supposed to reside at @var{addr}.
3958 @end table
3959
3960 @node Variables
3961 @section Program variables
3962
3963 The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable
3964 in your program.
3965
3966 Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
3967 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}); they must either be global
3968 (or static) or be visible according to the scope rules of the
3969 programming language from the point of execution in that frame. This
3970 means that in the function
3971
3972 @example
3973 foo (a)
3974 int a;
3975 @{
3976 bar (a);
3977 @{
3978 int b = test ();
3979 bar (b);
3980 @}
3981 @}
3982 @end example
3983
3984 @noindent
3985 you can examine and use the variable @code{a} whenever your program is
3986 executing within the function @code{foo}, but you can only use or
3987 examine the variable @code{b} while your program is executing inside
3988 the block where @code{b} is declared.
3989
3990 @cindex variable name conflict
3991 There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
3992 scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
3993 in this file. But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
3994 function with the same name (in different source files). If that
3995 happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects. If you wish,
3996 you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
3997 using the colon-colon notation:
3998
3999 @cindex colon-colon
4000 @iftex
4001 @c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
4002 @kindex ::
4003 @end iftex
4004 @example
4005 @var{file}::@var{variable}
4006 @var{function}::@var{variable}
4007 @end example
4008
4009 @noindent
4010 Here @var{file} or @var{function} is the name of the context for the
4011 static @var{variable}. In the case of file names, you can use quotes to
4012 make sure @value{GDBN} parses the file name as a single word---for example,
4013 to print a global value of @code{x} defined in @file{f2.c}:
4014
4015 @example
4016 (@value{GDBP}) p 'f2.c'::x
4017 @end example
4018
4019 @ifclear CONLY
4020 @cindex C++ scope resolution
4021 This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
4022 use of the same notation in C++. @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C++
4023 scope resolution operator in @value{GDBN} expressions.
4024 @c FIXME: Um, so what happens in one of those rare cases where it's in
4025 @c conflict?? --mew
4026 @end ifclear
4027
4028 @cindex wrong values
4029 @cindex variable values, wrong
4030 @quotation
4031 @emph{Warning:} Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
4032 wrong value at certain points in a function---just after entry to a new
4033 scope, and just before exit.
4034 @end quotation
4035 You may see this problem when you are stepping by machine instructions.
4036 This is because on most machines, it takes more than one instruction to
4037 set up a stack frame (including local variable definitions); if you are
4038 stepping by machine instructions, variables may appear to have the wrong
4039 values until the stack frame is completely built. On exit, it usually
4040 also takes more than one machine instruction to destroy a stack frame;
4041 after you begin stepping through that group of instructions, local
4042 variable definitions may be gone.
4043
4044 @node Arrays
4045 @section Artificial arrays
4046
4047 @cindex artificial array
4048 @kindex @@
4049 It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
4050 same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
4051 dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
4052 program.
4053
4054 You can do this by referring to a contiguous span of memory as an
4055 @dfn{artificial array}, using the binary operator @samp{@@}. The left
4056 operand of @samp{@@} should be the first element of the desired array,
4057 as an individual object. The right operand should be the desired length
4058 of the array. The result is an array value whose elements are all of
4059 the type of the left argument. The first element is actually the left
4060 argument; the second element comes from bytes of memory immediately
4061 following those that hold the first element, and so on. Here is an
4062 example. If a program says
4063
4064 @example
4065 int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));
4066 @end example
4067
4068 @noindent
4069 you can print the contents of @code{array} with
4070
4071 @example
4072 p *array@@len
4073 @end example
4074
4075 The left operand of @samp{@@} must reside in memory. Array values made
4076 with @samp{@@} in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
4077 subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
4078 Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
4079 (@pxref{Value History, ,Value history}), after printing one out.
4080
4081 Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
4082 moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
4083 actually be adjacent---for example, if you are interested in the values
4084 of pointers in an array. One useful work-around in this situation is
4085 to use a convenience variable (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
4086 variables}) as a counter in an expression that prints the first
4087 interesting value, and then repeat that expression via @key{RET}. For
4088 instance, suppose you have an array @code{dtab} of pointers to
4089 structures, and you are interested in the values of a field @code{fv}
4090 in each structure. Here is an example of what you might type:
4091
4092 @example
4093 set $i = 0
4094 p dtab[$i++]->fv
4095 @key{RET}
4096 @key{RET}
4097 @dots{}
4098 @end example
4099
4100 @node Output Formats
4101 @section Output formats
4102
4103 @cindex formatted output
4104 @cindex output formats
4105 By default, @value{GDBN} prints a value according to its data type. Sometimes
4106 this is not what you want. For example, you might want to print a number
4107 in hex, or a pointer in decimal. Or you might want to view data in memory
4108 at a certain address as a character string or as an instruction. To do
4109 these things, specify an @dfn{output format} when you print a value.
4110
4111 The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
4112 already computed. This is done by starting the arguments of the
4113 @code{print} command with a slash and a format letter. The format
4114 letters supported are:
4115
4116 @table @code
4117 @item x
4118 Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer in
4119 hexadecimal.
4120
4121 @item d
4122 Print as integer in signed decimal.
4123
4124 @item u
4125 Print as integer in unsigned decimal.
4126
4127 @item o
4128 Print as integer in octal.
4129
4130 @item t
4131 Print as integer in binary. The letter @samp{t} stands for ``two''.
4132 @footnote{@samp{b} cannot be used because these format letters are also
4133 used with the @code{x} command, where @samp{b} stands for ``byte'';
4134 @pxref{Memory,,Examining memory}.}
4135
4136 @item a
4137 @cindex unknown address, locating
4138 Print as an address, both absolute in hexadecimal and as an offset from
4139 the nearest preceding symbol. You can use this format used to discover
4140 where (in what function) an unknown address is located:
4141
4142 @example
4143 (@value{GDBP}) p/a 0x54320
4144 $3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>
4145 @end example
4146
4147 @item c
4148 Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.
4149
4150 @item f
4151 Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
4152 using typical floating point syntax.
4153 @end table
4154
4155 For example, to print the program counter in hex (@pxref{Registers}), type
4156
4157 @example
4158 p/x $pc
4159 @end example
4160
4161 @noindent
4162 Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
4163 names in @value{GDBN} cannot contain a slash.
4164
4165 To reprint the last value in the value history with a different format,
4166 you can use the @code{print} command with just a format and no
4167 expression. For example, @samp{p/x} reprints the last value in hex.
4168
4169 @node Memory
4170 @section Examining memory
4171
4172 You can use the command @code{x} (for ``examine'') to examine memory in
4173 any of several formats, independently of your program's data types.
4174
4175 @cindex examining memory
4176 @table @code
4177 @kindex x
4178 @item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
4179 @itemx x @var{addr}
4180 @itemx x
4181 Use the @code{x} command to examine memory.
4182 @end table
4183
4184 @var{n}, @var{f}, and @var{u} are all optional parameters that specify how
4185 much memory to display and how to format it; @var{addr} is an
4186 expression giving the address where you want to start displaying memory.
4187 If you use defaults for @var{nfu}, you need not type the slash @samp{/}.
4188 Several commands set convenient defaults for @var{addr}.
4189
4190 @table @r
4191 @item @var{n}, the repeat count
4192 The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1. It specifies
4193 how much memory (counting by units @var{u}) to display.
4194 @c This really is **decimal**; unaffected by 'set radix' as of GDB
4195 @c 4.1.2.
4196
4197 @item @var{f}, the display format
4198 The display format is one of the formats used by @code{print},
4199 or @samp{s} (null-terminated string) or @samp{i} (machine instruction).
4200 The default is @samp{x} (hexadecimal) initially, or the format from the
4201 last time you used either @code{x} or @code{print}.
4202
4203 @item @var{u}, the unit size
4204 The unit size is any of
4205
4206 @table @code
4207 @item b
4208 Bytes.
4209 @item h
4210 Halfwords (two bytes).
4211 @item w
4212 Words (four bytes). This is the initial default.
4213 @item g
4214 Giant words (eight bytes).
4215 @end table
4216
4217 Each time you specify a unit size with @code{x}, that size becomes the
4218 default unit the next time you use @code{x}. (For the @samp{s} and
4219 @samp{i} formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)
4220
4221 @item @var{addr}, starting display address
4222 @var{addr} is the address where you want @value{GDBN} to begin displaying
4223 memory. The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may);
4224 it is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
4225 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on expressions. The default for
4226 @var{addr} is usually just after the last address examined---but several
4227 other commands also set the default address: @code{info breakpoints} (to
4228 the address of the last breakpoint listed), @code{info line} (to the
4229 starting address of a line), and @code{print} (if you use it to display
4230 a value from memory).
4231 @end table
4232
4233 For example, @samp{x/3uh 0x54320} is a request to display three halfwords
4234 (@code{h}) of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (@samp{u}),
4235 starting at address @code{0x54320}. @samp{x/4xw $sp} prints the four
4236 words (@samp{w}) of memory above the stack pointer (here, @samp{$sp};
4237 @pxref{Registers}) in hexadecimal (@samp{x}).
4238
4239 Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
4240 letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
4241 unit size or format comes first; either order works. The output
4242 specifications @samp{4xw} and @samp{4wx} mean exactly the same thing.
4243 (However, the count @var{n} must come first; @samp{wx4} does not work.)
4244
4245 Even though the unit size @var{u} is ignored for the formats @samp{s}
4246 and @samp{i}, you might still want to use a count @var{n}; for example,
4247 @samp{3i} specifies that you want to see three machine instructions,
4248 including any operands. The command @code{disassemble} gives an
4249 alternative way of inspecting machine instructions; @pxref{Machine
4250 Code,,Source and machine code}.
4251
4252 All the defaults for the arguments to @code{x} are designed to make it
4253 easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
4254 you use @code{x}. For example, after you have inspected three machine
4255 instructions with @samp{x/3i @var{addr}}, you can inspect the next seven
4256 with just @samp{x/7}. If you use @key{RET} to repeat the @code{x} command,
4257 the repeat count @var{n} is used again; the other arguments default as
4258 for successive uses of @code{x}.
4259
4260 @cindex @code{$_}, @code{$__}, and value history
4261 The addresses and contents printed by the @code{x} command are not saved
4262 in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
4263 would get in the way. Instead, @value{GDBN} makes these values available for
4264 subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
4265 @code{$_} and @code{$__}. After an @code{x} command, the last address
4266 examined is available for use in expressions in the convenience variable
4267 @code{$_}. The contents of that address, as examined, are available in
4268 the convenience variable @code{$__}.
4269
4270 If the @code{x} command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
4271 are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
4272 address printed if several units were printed on the last line of output.
4273
4274 @node Auto Display
4275 @section Automatic display
4276 @cindex automatic display
4277 @cindex display of expressions
4278
4279 If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
4280 (to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the @dfn{automatic
4281 display list} so that @value{GDBN} prints its value each time your program stops.
4282 Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it;
4283 to remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.
4284 The automatic display looks like this:
4285
4286 @example
4287 2: foo = 38
4288 3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804
4289 @end example
4290
4291 @noindent
4292 This display shows item numbers, expressions and their current values. As with
4293 displays you request manually using @code{x} or @code{print}, you can
4294 specify the output format you prefer; in fact, @code{display} decides
4295 whether to use @code{print} or @code{x} depending on how elaborate your
4296 format specification is---it uses @code{x} if you specify a unit size,
4297 or one of the two formats (@samp{i} and @samp{s}) that are only
4298 supported by @code{x}; otherwise it uses @code{print}.
4299
4300 @table @code
4301 @item display @var{exp}
4302 @kindex display
4303 Add the expression @var{exp} to the list of expressions to display
4304 each time your program stops. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
4305
4306 @code{display} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
4307
4308 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{exp}
4309 For @var{fmt} specifying only a display format and not a size or
4310 count, add the expression @var{exp} to the auto-display list but
4311 arrange to display it each time in the specified format @var{fmt}.
4312 @xref{Output Formats,,Output formats}.
4313
4314 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{addr}
4315 For @var{fmt} @samp{i} or @samp{s}, or including a unit-size or a
4316 number of units, add the expression @var{addr} as a memory address to
4317 be examined each time your program stops. Examining means in effect
4318 doing @samp{x/@var{fmt} @var{addr}}. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
4319 @end table
4320
4321 For example, @samp{display/i $pc} can be helpful, to see the machine
4322 instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (@samp{$pc}
4323 is a common name for the program counter; @pxref{Registers}).
4324
4325 @table @code
4326 @item undisplay @var{dnums}@dots{}
4327 @itemx delete display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4328 @kindex delete display
4329 @kindex undisplay
4330 Remove item numbers @var{dnums} from the list of expressions to display.
4331
4332 @code{undisplay} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
4333 (Otherwise you would just get the error @samp{No display number @dots{}}.)
4334
4335 @item disable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4336 @kindex disable display
4337 Disable the display of item numbers @var{dnums}. A disabled display
4338 item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten. It may be
4339 enabled again later.
4340
4341 @item enable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4342 @kindex enable display
4343 Enable display of item numbers @var{dnums}. It becomes effective once
4344 again in auto display of its expression, until you specify otherwise.
4345
4346 @item display
4347 Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as is
4348 done when your program stops.
4349
4350 @item info display
4351 @kindex info display
4352 Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
4353 automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing the
4354 values. This includes disabled expressions, which are marked as such.
4355 It also includes expressions which would not be displayed right now
4356 because they refer to automatic variables not currently available.
4357 @end table
4358
4359 If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not make
4360 sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up. Such an
4361 expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
4362 variables is not defined. For example, if you give the command
4363 @code{display last_char} while inside a function with an argument
4364 @code{last_char}, @value{GDBN} displays this argument while your program
4365 continues to stop inside that function. When it stops elsewhere---where
4366 there is no variable @code{last_char}---the display is disabled
4367 automatically. The next time your program stops where @code{last_char}
4368 is meaningful, you can enable the display expression once again.
4369
4370 @node Print Settings
4371 @section Print settings
4372
4373 @cindex format options
4374 @cindex print settings
4375 @value{GDBN} provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures,
4376 and symbols are printed.
4377
4378 @noindent
4379 These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:
4380
4381 @table @code
4382 @item set print address
4383 @itemx set print address on
4384 @kindex set print address
4385 @value{GDBN} prints memory addresses showing the location of stack
4386 traces, structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth,
4387 even when it also displays the contents of those addresses. The default
4388 is @code{on}. For example, this is what a stack frame display looks like, with
4389 @code{set print address on}:
4390
4391 @smallexample
4392 @group
4393 (@value{GDBP}) f
4394 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
4395 at input.c:530
4396 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4397 @end group
4398 @end smallexample
4399
4400 @item set print address off
4401 Do not print addresses when displaying their contents. For example,
4402 this is the same stack frame displayed with @code{set print address off}:
4403
4404 @smallexample
4405 @group
4406 (@value{GDBP}) set print addr off
4407 (@value{GDBP}) f
4408 #0 set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
4409 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4410 @end group
4411 @end smallexample
4412
4413 You can use @samp{set print address off} to eliminate all machine
4414 dependent displays from the @value{GDBN} interface. For example, with
4415 @code{print address off}, you should get the same text for backtraces on
4416 all machines---whether or not they involve pointer arguments.
4417
4418 @item show print address
4419 @kindex show print address
4420 Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.
4421 @end table
4422
4423 When @value{GDBN} prints a symbolic address, it normally prints the
4424 closest earlier symbol plus an offset. If that symbol does not uniquely
4425 identify the address (for example, it is a name whose scope is a single
4426 source file), you may need to disambiguate. One way to do this is with
4427 @code{info line}, for example @samp{info line *0x4537}. Alternately,
4428 you can set @value{GDBN} to print the source file and line number when
4429 it prints a symbolic address:
4430
4431 @table @code
4432 @item set print symbol-filename on
4433 @kindex set print symbol-filename
4434 Tell @value{GDBN} to print the source file name and line number of a
4435 symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4436
4437 @item set print symbol-filename off
4438 Do not print source file name and line number of a symbol. This is the
4439 default.
4440
4441 @item show print symbol-filename
4442 @kindex show print symbol-filename
4443 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print the source file name and
4444 line number of a symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4445 @end table
4446
4447 Another situation where it is helpful to show symbol filenames and line
4448 numbers is when disassembling code; @value{GDBN} shows you the line
4449 number and source file that corresponds to each instruction.
4450
4451 Also, you may wish to see the symbolic form only if the address being
4452 printed is reasonably close to the closest earlier symbol:
4453
4454 @table @code
4455 @item set print max-symbolic-offset @var{max-offset}
4456 @kindex set print max-symbolic-offset
4457 Tell @value{GDBN} to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
4458 offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less than
4459 @var{max-offset}. The default is 0, which means to always print the
4460 symbolic form of an address, if any symbol precedes it.
4461
4462 @item show print max-symbolic-offset
4463 @kindex show print max-symbolic-offset
4464 Ask how large the maximum offset is that @value{GDBN} prints in a
4465 symbolic address.
4466 @end table
4467
4468 @cindex wild pointer, interpreting
4469 @cindex pointer, finding referent
4470 If you have a pointer and you are not sure where it points, try
4471 @samp{set print symbol-filename on}. Then you can determine the name
4472 and source file location of the variable where it points, using
4473 @samp{p/a @var{pointer}}. This interprets the address in symbolic form.
4474 For example, here @value{GDBN} shows that a variable @code{ptt} points
4475 at another variable @code{t}, defined in @file{hi2.c}:
4476
4477 @example
4478 (@value{GDBP}) set print symbol-filename on
4479 (@value{GDBP}) p/a ptt
4480 $4 = 0xe008 <t in hi2.c>
4481 @end example
4482
4483 @quotation
4484 @emph{Warning:} For pointers that point to a local variable, @samp{p/a}
4485 does not show the symbol name and filename of the referent, even with
4486 the appropriate @code{set print} options turned on.
4487 @end quotation
4488
4489 Other settings control how different kinds of objects are printed:
4490
4491 @table @code
4492 @item set print array
4493 @itemx set print array on
4494 @kindex set print array
4495 Pretty-print arrays. This format is more convenient to read,
4496 but uses more space. The default is off.
4497
4498 @item set print array off
4499 Return to compressed format for arrays.
4500
4501 @item show print array
4502 @kindex show print array
4503 Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
4504 arrays.
4505
4506 @item set print elements @var{number-of-elements}
4507 @kindex set print elements
4508 If @value{GDBN} is printing a large array, it stops printing after it has
4509 printed the number of elements set by the @code{set print elements} command.
4510 This limit also applies to the display of strings.
4511 Setting the number of elements to zero means that the printing is unlimited.
4512
4513 @item show print elements
4514 @kindex show print elements
4515 Display the number of elements of a large array that @value{GDBN} prints
4516 before losing patience.
4517
4518 @item set print pretty on
4519 @kindex set print pretty
4520 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member per
4521 line, like this:
4522
4523 @smallexample
4524 @group
4525 $1 = @{
4526 next = 0x0,
4527 flags = @{
4528 sweet = 1,
4529 sour = 1
4530 @},
4531 meat = 0x54 "Pork"
4532 @}
4533 @end group
4534 @end smallexample
4535
4536 @item set print pretty off
4537 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in a compact format, like this:
4538
4539 @smallexample
4540 @group
4541 $1 = @{next = 0x0, flags = @{sweet = 1, sour = 1@}, \
4542 meat = 0x54 "Pork"@}
4543 @end group
4544 @end smallexample
4545
4546 @noindent
4547 This is the default format.
4548
4549 @item show print pretty
4550 @kindex show print pretty
4551 Show which format @value{GDBN} is using to print structures.
4552
4553 @item set print sevenbit-strings on
4554 @kindex set print sevenbit-strings
4555 Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set,
4556 @value{GDBN} displays any eight-bit characters (in strings or
4557 character values) using the notation @code{\}@var{nnn}. This setting is
4558 best if you are working in English (@sc{ascii}) and you use the
4559 high-order bit of characters as a marker or ``meta'' bit.
4560
4561 @item set print sevenbit-strings off
4562 Print full eight-bit characters. This allows the use of more
4563 international character sets, and is the default.
4564
4565 @item show print sevenbit-strings
4566 @kindex show print sevenbit-strings
4567 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} is printing only seven-bit characters.
4568
4569 @item set print union on
4570 @kindex set print union
4571 Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures. This is the
4572 default setting.
4573
4574 @item set print union off
4575 Tell @value{GDBN} not to print unions which are contained in structures.
4576
4577 @item show print union
4578 @kindex show print union
4579 Ask @value{GDBN} whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
4580 structures.
4581
4582 For example, given the declarations
4583
4584 @smallexample
4585 typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
4586 typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
4587 typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
4588 Bug_forms;
4589
4590 struct thing @{
4591 Species it;
4592 union @{
4593 Tree_forms tree;
4594 Bug_forms bug;
4595 @} form;
4596 @};
4597
4598 struct thing foo = @{Tree, @{Acorn@}@};
4599 @end smallexample
4600
4601 @noindent
4602 with @code{set print union on} in effect @samp{p foo} would print
4603
4604 @smallexample
4605 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon@}@}
4606 @end smallexample
4607
4608 @noindent
4609 and with @code{set print union off} in effect it would print
4610
4611 @smallexample
4612 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{...@}@}
4613 @end smallexample
4614 @end table
4615
4616 @ifclear CONLY
4617 @need 1000
4618 @noindent
4619 These settings are of interest when debugging C++ programs:
4620
4621 @table @code
4622 @item set print demangle
4623 @itemx set print demangle on
4624 @kindex set print demangle
4625 Print C++ names in their source form rather than in the encoded
4626 (``mangled'') form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
4627 linkage. The default is @samp{on}.
4628
4629 @item show print demangle
4630 @kindex show print demangle
4631 Show whether C++ names are printed in mangled or demangled form.
4632
4633 @item set print asm-demangle
4634 @itemx set print asm-demangle on
4635 @kindex set print asm-demangle
4636 Print C++ names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
4637 in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
4638 The default is off.
4639
4640 @item show print asm-demangle
4641 @kindex show print asm-demangle
4642 Show whether C++ names in assembly listings are printed in mangled
4643 or demangled form.
4644
4645 @item set demangle-style @var{style}
4646 @kindex set demangle-style
4647 @cindex C++ symbol decoding style
4648 @cindex symbol decoding style, C++
4649 Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers to
4650 represent C++ names. The choices for @var{style} are currently:
4651
4652 @table @code
4653 @item auto
4654 Allow @value{GDBN} to choose a decoding style by inspecting your program.
4655
4656 @item gnu
4657 Decode based on the GNU C++ compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
4658
4659 @item lucid
4660 Decode based on the Lucid C++ compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
4661
4662 @item arm
4663 Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C++ Annotated Reference Manual}.
4664 @strong{Warning:} this setting alone is not sufficient to allow
4665 debugging @code{cfront}-generated executables. @value{GDBN} would
4666 require further enhancement to permit that.
4667 @end table
4668
4669 @item show demangle-style
4670 @kindex show demangle-style
4671 Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C++ symbols.
4672
4673 @item set print object
4674 @itemx set print object on
4675 @kindex set print object
4676 When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the @emph{actual}
4677 (derived) type of the object rather than the @emph{declared} type, using
4678 the virtual function table.
4679
4680 @item set print object off
4681 Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
4682 virtual function table. This is the default setting.
4683
4684 @item show print object
4685 @kindex show print object
4686 Show whether actual, or declared, object types are displayed.
4687
4688 @item set print vtbl
4689 @itemx set print vtbl on
4690 @kindex set print vtbl
4691 Pretty print C++ virtual function tables. The default is off.
4692
4693 @item set print vtbl off
4694 Do not pretty print C++ virtual function tables.
4695
4696 @item show print vtbl
4697 @kindex show print vtbl
4698 Show whether C++ virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
4699 @end table
4700 @end ifclear
4701
4702 @node Value History
4703 @section Value history
4704
4705 @cindex value history
4706 Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN} @dfn{value
4707 history} so that you can refer to them in other expressions. Values are
4708 kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded (for example with
4709 the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands). When the symbol table
4710 changes, the value history is discarded, since the values may contain
4711 pointers back to the types defined in the symbol table.
4712
4713 @cindex @code{$}
4714 @cindex @code{$$}
4715 @cindex history number
4716 The values printed are given @dfn{history numbers} by which you can
4717 refer to them. These are successive integers starting with one.
4718 @code{print} shows you the history number assigned to a value by
4719 printing @samp{$@var{num} = } before the value; here @var{num} is the
4720 history number.
4721
4722 To refer to any previous value, use @samp{$} followed by the value's
4723 history number. The way @code{print} labels its output is designed to
4724 remind you of this. Just @code{$} refers to the most recent value in
4725 the history, and @code{$$} refers to the value before that.
4726 @code{$$@var{n}} refers to the @var{n}th value from the end; @code{$$2}
4727 is the value just prior to @code{$$}, @code{$$1} is equivalent to
4728 @code{$$}, and @code{$$0} is equivalent to @code{$}.
4729
4730 For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure and
4731 want to see the contents of the structure. It suffices to type
4732
4733 @example
4734 p *$
4735 @end example
4736
4737 If you have a chain of structures where the component @code{next} points
4738 to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:
4739
4740 @example
4741 p *$.next
4742 @end example
4743
4744 @noindent
4745 You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
4746 command---which you can do by just typing @key{RET}.
4747
4748 Note that the history records values, not expressions. If the value of
4749 @code{x} is 4 and you type these commands:
4750
4751 @example
4752 print x
4753 set x=5
4754 @end example
4755
4756 @noindent
4757 then the value recorded in the value history by the @code{print} command
4758 remains 4 even though the value of @code{x} has changed.
4759
4760 @table @code
4761 @kindex show values
4762 @item show values
4763 Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item numbers.
4764 This is like @samp{p@ $$9} repeated ten times, except that @code{show
4765 values} does not change the history.
4766
4767 @item show values @var{n}
4768 Print ten history values centered on history item number @var{n}.
4769
4770 @item show values +
4771 Print ten history values just after the values last printed. If no more
4772 values are available, produces no display.
4773 @end table
4774
4775 Pressing @key{RET} to repeat @code{show values @var{n}} has exactly the
4776 same effect as @samp{show values +}.
4777
4778 @node Convenience Vars
4779 @section Convenience variables
4780
4781 @cindex convenience variables
4782 @value{GDBN} provides @dfn{convenience variables} that you can use within
4783 @value{GDBN} to hold on to a value and refer to it later. These variables
4784 exist entirely within @value{GDBN}; they are not part of your program, and
4785 setting a convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution
4786 of your program. That is why you can use them freely.
4787
4788 Convenience variables are prefixed with @samp{$}. Any name preceded by
4789 @samp{$} can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of
4790 the predefined machine-specific register names (@pxref{Registers}).
4791 (Value history references, in contrast, are @emph{numbers} preceded
4792 by @samp{$}. @xref{Value History, ,Value history}.)
4793
4794 You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
4795 expression, just as you would set a variable in your program.
4796 For example:
4797
4798 @example
4799 set $foo = *object_ptr
4800 @end example
4801
4802 @noindent
4803 would save in @code{$foo} the value contained in the object pointed to by
4804 @code{object_ptr}.
4805
4806 Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it, but its
4807 value is @code{void} until you assign a new value. You can alter the
4808 value with another assignment at any time.
4809
4810 Convenience variables have no fixed types. You can assign a convenience
4811 variable any type of value, including structures and arrays, even if
4812 that variable already has a value of a different type. The convenience
4813 variable, when used as an expression, has the type of its current value.
4814
4815 @table @code
4816 @item show convenience
4817 @kindex show convenience
4818 Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their values.
4819 Abbreviated @code{show con}.
4820 @end table
4821
4822 One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
4823 incremented or a pointer to be advanced. For example, to print
4824 a field from successive elements of an array of structures:
4825
4826 @example
4827 set $i = 0
4828 print bar[$i++]->contents
4829 @i{@dots{} repeat that command by typing @key{RET}.}
4830 @end example
4831
4832 Some convenience variables are created automatically by @value{GDBN} and given
4833 values likely to be useful.
4834
4835 @table @code
4836 @item $_
4837 @kindex $_
4838 The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
4839 the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}). Other
4840 commands which provide a default address for @code{x} to examine also
4841 set @code{$_} to that address; these commands include @code{info line}
4842 and @code{info breakpoint}. The type of @code{$_} is @code{void *}
4843 except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
4844 to the type of @code{$__}.
4845
4846 @item $__
4847 @kindex $__
4848 The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
4849 to the value found in the last address examined. Its type is chosen
4850 to match the format in which the data was printed.
4851 @end table
4852
4853 @node Registers
4854 @section Registers
4855
4856 @cindex registers
4857 You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
4858 with names starting with @samp{$}. The names of registers are different
4859 for each machine; use @code{info registers} to see the names used on
4860 your machine.
4861
4862 @table @code
4863 @item info registers
4864 @kindex info registers
4865 Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
4866 registers (in the selected stack frame).
4867
4868 @item info all-registers
4869 @kindex info all-registers
4870 @cindex floating point registers
4871 Print the names and values of all registers, including floating-point
4872 registers.
4873
4874 @item info registers @var{regname} @dots{}
4875 Print the relativized value of each specified register @var{regname}.
4876 @var{regname} may be any register name valid on the machine you are using, with
4877 or without the initial @samp{$}.
4878 @end table
4879
4880 @value{GDBN} has four ``standard'' register names that are available (in
4881 expressions) on most machines---whenever they do not conflict with an
4882 architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers. The register names
4883 @code{$pc} and @code{$sp} are used for the program counter register and
4884 the stack pointer. @code{$fp} is used for a register that contains a
4885 pointer to the current stack frame, and @code{$ps} is used for a
4886 register that contains the processor status. For example,
4887 you could print the program counter in hex with
4888
4889 @example
4890 p/x $pc
4891 @end example
4892
4893 @noindent
4894 or print the instruction to be executed next with
4895
4896 @example
4897 x/i $pc
4898 @end example
4899
4900 @noindent
4901 or add four to the stack pointer@footnote{This is a way of removing
4902 one word from the stack, on machines where stacks grow downward in
4903 memory (most machines, nowadays). This assumes that the innermost
4904 stack frame is selected; setting @code{$sp} is not allowed when other
4905 stack frames are selected. To pop entire frames off the stack,
4906 regardless of machine architecture, use @code{return};
4907 @pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}.} with
4908
4909 @example
4910 set $sp += 4
4911 @end example
4912
4913 Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available on
4914 your machine even though the machine has different canonical mnemonics,
4915 so long as there is no conflict. The @code{info registers} command
4916 shows the canonical names. For example, on the SPARC, @code{info
4917 registers} displays the processor status register as @code{$psr} but you
4918 can also refer to it as @code{$ps}.
4919
4920 @value{GDBN} always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
4921 integer when the register is examined in this way. Some machines have
4922 special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
4923 registers are considered to have floating point values. There is no way
4924 to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
4925 (although you can @emph{print} it as a floating point value with
4926 @samp{print/f $@var{regname}}).
4927
4928 Some registers have distinct ``raw'' and ``virtual'' data formats. This
4929 means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
4930 the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
4931 sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
4932 coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
4933 programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format. In such
4934 cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format that
4935 makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
4936 prints the data in both formats.
4937
4938 Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
4939 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). This means that you get the
4940 value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
4941 were exited and their saved registers restored. In order to see the
4942 true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
4943 frame (with @samp{frame 0}).
4944
4945 However, @value{GDBN} must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
4946 code generated by your compiler. If some registers are not saved, or if
4947 @value{GDBN} is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack
4948 frame makes no difference.
4949
4950 @ifset AMD29K
4951 @table @code
4952 @item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
4953 @kindex set rstack_high_address
4954 @cindex AMD 29K register stack
4955 @cindex register stack, AMD29K
4956 On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
4957 ``register stack''. There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the extent
4958 of this stack. Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the stack is ``large
4959 enough''. This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing memory locations that
4960 do not exist. If necessary, you can get around this problem by
4961 specifying the ending address of the register stack with the @code{set
4962 rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an address, which
4963 you probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
4964 hexadecimal.
4965
4966 @item show rstack_high_address
4967 @kindex show rstack_high_address
4968 Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
4969 processors.
4970 @end table
4971 @end ifset
4972
4973 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
4974 @node Floating Point Hardware
4975 @section Floating point hardware
4976 @cindex floating point
4977
4978 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
4979 Depending on the host machine architecture, @value{GDBN} may be able to give
4980 you more information about the status of the floating point hardware.
4981
4982 @table @code
4983 @item info float
4984 @kindex info float
4985 Display hardware-dependent information about the floating
4986 point unit. The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
4987 floating point chip; on some platforms, @samp{info float} is not
4988 available at all.
4989 @end table
4990 @c FIXME: this is a cop-out. Try to get examples, explanations. Only
4991 @c FIXME...supported currently on arm's and 386's. Mark properly with
4992 @c FIXME... m4 macros to isolate general statements from hardware-dep,
4993 @c FIXME... at that point.
4994 @end ifclear
4995
4996 @ifclear CONLY
4997 @node Languages
4998 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
4999 @cindex languages
5000
5001 @ifset MOD2
5002 Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
5003 rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
5004 dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
5005 Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
5006 represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C are written
5007 like @samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
5008 @end ifset
5009
5010 @cindex working language
5011 Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
5012 allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
5013 native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
5014 consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
5015 language you use to build expressions, called the @dfn{working
5016 language}, can be selected manually, or @value{GDBN} can set it
5017 automatically.
5018
5019 @menu
5020 * Setting:: Switching between source languages
5021 * Show:: Displaying the language
5022 @ifset MOD2
5023 * Checks:: Type and range checks
5024 @end ifset
5025
5026 * Support:: Supported languages
5027 @end menu
5028
5029 @node Setting
5030 @section Switching between source languages
5031
5032 There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
5033 set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
5034 @code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, @value{GDBN}
5035 defaults to setting the language automatically.
5036
5037 @menu
5038 * Manually:: Setting the working language manually
5039 * Automatically:: Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
5040 @end menu
5041
5042 @node Manually
5043 @subsection Setting the working language
5044
5045 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
5046 expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
5047 your program.
5048
5049 @kindex set language
5050 If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue the
5051 command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
5052 a language, such as
5053 @ifclear MOD2
5054 @code{c}.
5055 @end ifclear
5056 @ifset MOD2
5057 @code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
5058 @end ifset
5059 For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
5060 @c FIXME: rms: eventually this command should be "help set language".
5061
5062 @ifset MOD2
5063 Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
5064 language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
5065 to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
5066 source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
5067 languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
5068 source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
5069 command such as:
5070
5071 @example
5072 print a = b + c
5073 @end example
5074
5075 @noindent
5076 might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
5077 @code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
5078 printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
5079 @code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
5080 @end ifset
5081
5082 @node Automatically
5083 @subsection Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
5084
5085 To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use @samp{set
5086 language local} or @samp{set language auto}. @value{GDBN} then infers the
5087 language that a program was written in by looking at the name of its
5088 source files, and examining their extensions:
5089
5090 @table @file
5091 @ifset MOD2
5092 @item *.mod
5093 Modula-2 source file
5094 @end ifset
5095
5096 @item *.c
5097 C source file
5098
5099 @item *.C
5100 @itemx *.cc
5101 C++ source file
5102 @end table
5103
5104 This information is recorded for each function or procedure in a source
5105 file. When your program stops in a frame (usually by encountering a
5106 breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the working language to the language recorded
5107 for the function in that frame. If the language for a frame is unknown
5108 (that is, if the function or block corresponding to the frame was
5109 defined in a source file that does not have a recognized extension), the
5110 current working language is not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
5111
5112 This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
5113 entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
5114 written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
5115 a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
5116 case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
5117
5118 @node Show
5119 @section Displaying the language
5120
5121 The following commands help you find out which language is the
5122 working language, and also what language source files were written in.
5123
5124 @kindex show language
5125 @kindex info frame
5126 @kindex info source
5127 @table @code
5128 @item show language
5129 Display the current working language. This is the
5130 language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
5131 build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
5132
5133 @item info frame
5134 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information
5135 about a frame}) is the source language for this frame. This
5136 language becomes the working language if you use an
5137 identifier from this frame.
5138
5139 @item info source
5140 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Symbols, ,Examining the
5141 Symbol Table}) is the source language of this source file.
5142 @end table
5143
5144 @ifset MOD2
5145 @node Checks
5146 @section Type and range checking
5147
5148 @quotation
5149 @emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
5150 checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
5151 section documents the intended facilities.
5152 @end quotation
5153 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
5154
5155 Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
5156 errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
5157 checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
5158 sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
5159 these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
5160 by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
5161 errors when your program is running.
5162
5163 @value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
5164 Although @value{GDBN} does not check the statements in your program, it
5165 can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for evaluation via
5166 the @code{print} command, for example. As with the working language,
5167 @value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
5168 your program's source language. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages},
5169 for the default settings of supported languages.
5170
5171 @menu
5172 * Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
5173 * Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
5174 @end menu
5175
5176 @cindex type checking
5177 @cindex checks, type
5178 @node Type Checking
5179 @subsection An overview of type checking
5180
5181 Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
5182 arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
5183 otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
5184 errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
5185
5186 @example
5187 1 + 2 @result{} 3
5188 @exdent but
5189 @error{} 1 + 2.3
5190 @end example
5191
5192 The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
5193 type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
5194
5195 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the @value{GDBN}
5196 type checker to skip checking; to treat any mismatches as errors and
5197 abandon the expression; or only issue warnings when type mismatches
5198 occur, but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
5199 these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
5200 also issues a warning.
5201
5202 Even though you may turn type checking off, other type-based reasons may
5203 prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression. For instance, @value{GDBN} does not
5204 know how to add an @code{int} and a @code{struct foo}. These particular
5205 type errors have nothing to do with the language in use, and usually
5206 arise from expressions, such as the one described above, which make
5207 little sense to evaluate anyway.
5208
5209 Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
5210 instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
5211 operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
5212 represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
5213 operators. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for further
5214 details on specific languages.
5215
5216 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
5217
5218 @kindex set check
5219 @kindex set check type
5220 @kindex show check type
5221 @table @code
5222 @item set check type auto
5223 Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
5224 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
5225 each language.
5226
5227 @item set check type on
5228 @itemx set check type off
5229 Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
5230 current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
5231 match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
5232 evaluating an expression while typechecking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
5233 message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
5234
5235 @item set check type warn
5236 Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
5237 evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
5238 be impossible for other reasons. For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
5239 numbers and structures.
5240
5241 @item show type
5242 Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN} is
5243 setting it automatically.
5244 @end table
5245
5246 @cindex range checking
5247 @cindex checks, range
5248 @node Range Checking
5249 @subsection An overview of range checking
5250
5251 In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
5252 bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
5253 checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
5254 computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
5255 not exceed the bounds of the array.
5256
5257 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
5258 @value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
5259 always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
5260 warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
5261
5262 A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
5263 array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
5264 of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
5265 error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
5266 result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
5267 the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
5268
5269 @example
5270 @var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
5271 @end example
5272
5273 This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
5274 specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Support, ,
5275 Supported languages}, for further details on specific languages.
5276
5277 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
5278
5279 @kindex set check
5280 @kindex set check range
5281 @kindex show check range
5282 @table @code
5283 @item set check range auto
5284 Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
5285 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
5286 each language.
5287
5288 @item set check range on
5289 @itemx set check range off
5290 Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
5291 current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
5292 match the language default. If a range error occurs, then a message
5293 is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
5294
5295 @item set check range warn
5296 Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
5297 but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
5298 expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
5299 memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many Unix
5300 systems).
5301
5302 @item show range
5303 Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
5304 being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
5305 @end table
5306 @end ifset
5307
5308 @node Support
5309 @section Supported languages
5310
5311 @ifset MOD2
5312 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, C++, and Modula-2.
5313 @end ifset
5314 @ifclear MOD2
5315 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, and C++.
5316 @end ifclear
5317 Some @value{GDBN} features may be used in expressions regardless of the
5318 language you use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators,
5319 and the @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions,
5320 ,Expressions}) can be used with the constructs of any supported
5321 language.
5322
5323 The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
5324 supported by @value{GDBN}. These sections are not meant to be language
5325 tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
5326 @value{GDBN} expression parser accepts, and what input and output
5327 formats should look like for different languages. There are many good
5328 books written on each of these languages; please look to these for a
5329 language reference or tutorial.
5330
5331 @ifset MOD2
5332 @menu
5333 * C:: C and C++
5334 * Modula-2:: Modula-2
5335 @end menu
5336
5337 @node C
5338 @subsection C and C++
5339 @cindex C and C++
5340 @cindex expressions in C or C++
5341
5342 Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
5343 to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss both languages
5344 together.
5345 @end ifset
5346 @ifclear MOD2
5347 @c Cancel this below, under same condition, at end of this chapter!
5348 @raisesections
5349 @end ifclear
5350
5351 @cindex C++
5352 @kindex g++
5353 @cindex GNU C++
5354 The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the GNU C++
5355 compiler and @value{GDBN}. Therefore, to debug your C++ code
5356 effectively, you must compile your C++ programs with the GNU C++
5357 compiler, @code{g++}.
5358
5359 For best results when debugging C++ programs, use the stabs debugging
5360 format. You can select that format explicitly with the @code{g++}
5361 command-line options @samp{-gstabs} or @samp{-gstabs+}. See
5362 @ref{Debugging Options,,Options for Debugging Your Program or GNU CC,
5363 gcc.info, Using GNU CC}, for more information.
5364 @end ifclear
5365 @ifset CONLY
5366 @node C
5367 @chapter C Language Support
5368 @cindex C language
5369 @cindex expressions in C
5370
5371 Information specific to the C language is built into @value{GDBN} so that you
5372 can use C expressions while degugging. This also permits @value{GDBN} to
5373 output values in a manner consistent with C conventions.
5374
5375 @menu
5376 * C Operators:: C operators
5377 * C Constants:: C constants
5378 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5379 @end menu
5380 @end ifset
5381 @ifclear CONLY
5382 @menu
5383 * C Operators:: C and C++ operators
5384 * C Constants:: C and C++ constants
5385 * Cplus expressions:: C++ expressions
5386 * C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
5387 @ifset MOD2
5388 * C Checks:: C and C++ type and range checks
5389 @end ifset
5390
5391 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5392 * Debugging C plus plus:: Special features for C++
5393 @end menu
5394 @end ifclear
5395
5396 @ifclear CONLY
5397 @cindex C and C++ operators
5398 @node C Operators
5399 @subsubsection C and C++ operators
5400 @end ifclear
5401 @ifset CONLY
5402 @cindex C operators
5403 @node C Operators
5404 @section C operators
5405 @end ifset
5406
5407 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5408 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5409 often defined on groups of types.
5410
5411 @ifclear CONLY
5412 For the purposes of C and C++, the following definitions hold:
5413 @end ifclear
5414
5415 @itemize @bullet
5416 @item
5417 @emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
5418 specifiers; @code{char}; and @code{enum}.
5419
5420 @item
5421 @emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float} and @code{double}.
5422
5423 @item
5424 @emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type}
5425 *)}.
5426
5427 @item
5428 @emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
5429 @end itemize
5430
5431 @noindent
5432 The following operators are supported. They are listed here
5433 in order of increasing precedence:
5434
5435 @table @code
5436 @item ,
5437 The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
5438 are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
5439 expression being the last expression evaluated.
5440
5441 @item =
5442 Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
5443 assigned. Defined on scalar types.
5444
5445 @item @var{op}=
5446 Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
5447 and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
5448 @w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precendence.
5449 @var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
5450 @code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
5451
5452 @item ?:
5453 The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
5454 of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
5455 integral type.
5456
5457 @item ||
5458 Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5459
5460 @item &&
5461 Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5462
5463 @item |
5464 Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5465
5466 @item ^
5467 Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5468
5469 @item &
5470 Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5471
5472 @item ==@r{, }!=
5473 Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
5474 expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
5475
5476 @item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
5477 Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
5478 Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
5479 and non-zero for true.
5480
5481 @item <<@r{, }>>
5482 left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
5483
5484 @item @@
5485 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5486
5487 @item +@r{, }-
5488 Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
5489 pointer types.
5490
5491 @item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
5492 Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
5493 defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
5494 integral types.
5495
5496 @item ++@r{, }--
5497 Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
5498 operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
5499 when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
5500 operation takes place.
5501
5502 @item *
5503 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
5504 @code{++}.
5505
5506 @item &
5507 Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
5508
5509 @ifclear CONLY
5510 For debugging C++, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
5511 allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
5512 (or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}}) to examine the address
5513 where a C++ reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
5514 stored.
5515 @end ifclear
5516
5517 @item -
5518 Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
5519 precedence as @code{++}.
5520
5521 @item !
5522 Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5523 @code{++}.
5524
5525 @item ~
5526 Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5527 @code{++}.
5528
5529
5530 @item .@r{, }->
5531 Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
5532 @value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
5533 pointer based on the stored type information.
5534 Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
5535
5536 @item []
5537 Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
5538 @code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5539
5540 @item ()
5541 Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5542
5543 @ifclear CONLY
5544 @item ::
5545 C++ scope resolution operator. Defined on
5546 @code{struct}, @code{union}, and @code{class} types.
5547 @end ifclear
5548
5549 @item ::
5550 Doubled colons
5551 @ifclear CONLY
5552 also
5553 @end ifclear
5554 represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@pxref{Expressions,
5555 ,Expressions}).
5556 @ifclear CONLY
5557 Same precedence as @code{::}, above.
5558 @end ifclear
5559 @end table
5560
5561 @ifclear CONLY
5562 @cindex C and C++ constants
5563 @node C Constants
5564 @subsubsection C and C++ constants
5565
5566 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the
5567 following ways:
5568 @end ifclear
5569 @ifset CONLY
5570 @cindex C constants
5571 @node C Constants
5572 @section C constants
5573
5574 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C in the
5575 following ways:
5576 @end ifset
5577
5578 @itemize @bullet
5579 @item
5580 Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
5581 specified by a leading @samp{0} (ie. zero), and hexadecimal constants by
5582 a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
5583 @samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
5584 @code{long} value.
5585
5586 @item
5587 Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
5588 point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
5589 exponent. An exponent is of the form:
5590 @samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
5591 sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
5592
5593 @item
5594 Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
5595 integral equivalents.
5596
5597 @item
5598 Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
5599 (@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
5600 (usually its @sc{ASCII} value). Within quotes, the single character may
5601 be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
5602 the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
5603 of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
5604 @samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
5605 @samp{\n} for newline.
5606
5607 @item
5608 String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
5609 by double quotes (@code{"}).
5610
5611 @item
5612 Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write pointers
5613 to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
5614
5615 @item
5616 Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
5617 and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
5618 integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
5619 and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
5620 @end itemize
5621
5622 @ifclear CONLY
5623 @node Cplus expressions
5624 @subsubsection C++ expressions
5625
5626 @cindex expressions in C++
5627 @value{GDBN} expression handling has a number of extensions to
5628 interpret a significant subset of C++ expressions.
5629
5630 @cindex C++ support, not in @sc{coff}
5631 @cindex @sc{coff} versus C++
5632 @cindex C++ and object formats
5633 @cindex object formats and C++
5634 @cindex a.out and C++
5635 @cindex @sc{ecoff} and C++
5636 @cindex @sc{xcoff} and C++
5637 @cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C++
5638 @cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C++
5639 @c FIXME!! GDB may eventually be able to debug C++ using DWARF; check
5640 @c periodically whether this has happened...
5641 @quotation
5642 @emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} can only debug C++ code if you compile with
5643 the GNU C++ compiler. Moreover, C++ debugging depends on the use of
5644 additional debugging information in the symbol table, and thus requires
5645 special support. @value{GDBN} has this support @emph{only} with the
5646 stabs debug format. In particular, if your compiler generates a.out,
5647 MIPS @sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or @sc{elf} with stabs extensions
5648 to the symbol table, these facilities are all available. (With GNU CC,
5649 you can use the @samp{-gstabs} option to request stabs debugging
5650 extensions explicitly.) Where the object code format is standard
5651 @sc{coff} or @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, on the other hand, most of the C++
5652 support in @value{GDBN} does @emph{not} work.
5653 @end quotation
5654
5655 @enumerate
5656
5657 @cindex member functions
5658 @item
5659 Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
5660
5661 @example
5662 count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
5663 @end example
5664
5665 @kindex this
5666 @cindex namespace in C++
5667 @item
5668 While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
5669 expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
5670 that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
5671 pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C++.
5672
5673 @cindex call overloaded functions
5674 @cindex type conversions in C++
5675 @item
5676 You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} resolves the function
5677 call to the right definition, with one restriction---you must use
5678 arguments of the type required by the function that you want to call.
5679 @value{GDBN} does not perform conversions requiring constructors or
5680 user-defined type operators.
5681
5682 @cindex reference declarations
5683 @item
5684 @value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use them in
5685 expressions just as you do in C++ source---they are automatically
5686 dereferenced.
5687
5688 In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
5689 reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
5690 avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
5691 The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
5692 you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
5693
5694 @item
5695 @value{GDBN} supports the C++ name resolution operator @code{::}---your
5696 expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
5697 one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
5698 necessary, for example in an expression like
5699 @samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. @value{GDBN} also allows
5700 resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C++
5701 debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program variables}).
5702 @end enumerate
5703
5704 @node C Defaults
5705 @subsubsection C and C++ defaults
5706 @cindex C and C++ defaults
5707
5708 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
5709 both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
5710 C or C++. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5711 selected the working language.
5712
5713 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it sets the
5714 working language to C or C++ on entering code compiled from a source file
5715 whose name ends with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or @file{.cc}.
5716 @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language}, for
5717 further details.
5718
5719 @ifset MOD2
5720 @c Type checking is (a) primarily motivated by Modula-2, and (b)
5721 @c unimplemented. If (b) changes, it might make sense to let this node
5722 @c appear even if Mod-2 does not, but meanwhile ignore it. pesch 16jul93.
5723 @node C Checks
5724 @subsubsection C and C++ type and range checks
5725 @cindex C and C++ checks
5726
5727 By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C++ expressions, type checking
5728 is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN}
5729 considers two variables type equivalent if:
5730
5731 @itemize @bullet
5732 @item
5733 The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
5734 enumerated tag.
5735
5736 @item
5737 Two two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
5738 declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
5739
5740 @ignore
5741 @c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
5742 @c FIXME--beers?
5743 @item
5744 The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
5745 declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
5746 compilers.)
5747 @end ignore
5748 @end itemize
5749
5750 Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
5751 indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
5752 that is not itself an array.
5753 @end ifset
5754 @end ifclear
5755
5756 @ifclear CONLY
5757 @node Debugging C
5758 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
5759 @end ifclear
5760 @ifset CONLY
5761 @node Debugging C
5762 @section @value{GDBN} and C
5763 @end ifset
5764
5765 The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
5766 the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
5767 inside a @code{struct}
5768 @ifclear CONLY
5769 or @code{class}
5770 @end ifclear
5771 is also printed.
5772 Otherwise, it appears as @samp{@{...@}}.
5773
5774 The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
5775 with pointers and a memory allocation function. @xref{Expressions,
5776 ,Expressions}.
5777
5778 @ifclear CONLY
5779 @node Debugging C plus plus
5780 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} features for C++
5781
5782 @cindex commands for C++
5783 Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
5784 designed specifically for use with C++. Here is a summary:
5785
5786 @table @code
5787 @cindex break in overloaded functions
5788 @item @r{breakpoint menus}
5789 When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
5790 @value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
5791 you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}.
5792
5793 @cindex overloading in C++
5794 @item rbreak @var{regex}
5795 Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
5796 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
5797 classes.
5798 @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.
5799
5800 @cindex C++ exception handling
5801 @item catch @var{exceptions}
5802 @itemx info catch
5803 Debug C++ exception handling using these commands. @xref{Exception
5804 Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
5805
5806 @cindex inheritance
5807 @item ptype @var{typename}
5808 Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
5809 @var{typename}.
5810 @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
5811
5812 @cindex C++ symbol display
5813 @item set print demangle
5814 @itemx show print demangle
5815 @itemx set print asm-demangle
5816 @itemx show print asm-demangle
5817 Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
5818 displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
5819 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5820
5821 @item set print object
5822 @itemx show print object
5823 Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
5824 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5825
5826 @item set print vtbl
5827 @itemx show print vtbl
5828 Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
5829 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5830
5831 @item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
5832 You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
5833 the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C++: type
5834 @code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
5835 also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
5836 available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
5837 @xref{Completion,, Command completion}, for details on how to do this.
5838 @end table
5839 @ifclear MOD2
5840 @c cancels "raisesections" under same conditions near bgn of chapter
5841 @lowersections
5842 @end ifclear
5843
5844 @ifset MOD2
5845 @node Modula-2
5846 @subsection Modula-2
5847 @cindex Modula-2
5848
5849 The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
5850 output from the GNU Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
5851 developed). Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
5852 attempting to debug executables produced by them is most likely
5853 to give an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
5854 table.
5855
5856 @cindex expressions in Modula-2
5857 @menu
5858 * M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
5859 * Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
5860 * M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
5861 * M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
5862 * Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
5863 * M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
5864 * M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5865 * GDB/M2:: @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5866 @end menu
5867
5868 @node M2 Operators
5869 @subsubsection Operators
5870 @cindex Modula-2 operators
5871
5872 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5873 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5874 often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
5875 following definitions hold:
5876
5877 @itemize @bullet
5878
5879 @item
5880 @emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
5881 their subranges.
5882
5883 @item
5884 @emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
5885
5886 @item
5887 @emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
5888
5889 @item
5890 @emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
5891 @var{type}}.
5892
5893 @item
5894 @emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
5895
5896 @item
5897 @emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
5898
5899 @item
5900 @emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
5901 @end itemize
5902
5903 @noindent
5904 The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
5905 increasing precedence:
5906
5907 @table @code
5908 @item ,
5909 Function argument or array index separator.
5910
5911 @item :=
5912 Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
5913 @var{value}.
5914
5915 @item <@r{, }>
5916 Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
5917 types.
5918
5919 @item <=@r{, }>=
5920 Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
5921 on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
5922 set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
5923
5924 @item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
5925 Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
5926 Same precedence as @code{<}. In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
5927 available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
5928 comment character.
5929
5930 @item IN
5931 Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
5932 Same precedence as @code{<}.
5933
5934 @item OR
5935 Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
5936
5937 @item AND@r{, }&
5938 Boolean conjuction. Defined on boolean types.
5939
5940 @item @@
5941 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5942
5943 @item +@r{, }-
5944 Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
5945 and difference on set types.
5946
5947 @item *
5948 Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
5949 on set types.
5950
5951 @item /
5952 Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
5953 types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
5954
5955 @item DIV@r{, }MOD
5956 Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
5957 precedence as @code{*}.
5958
5959 @item -
5960 Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
5961
5962 @item ^
5963 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
5964
5965 @item NOT
5966 Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
5967 @code{^}.
5968
5969 @item .
5970 @code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD} data. Same
5971 precedence as @code{^}.
5972
5973 @item []
5974 Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY} data. Same precedence as @code{^}.
5975
5976 @item ()
5977 Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects. Same precedence
5978 as @code{^}.
5979
5980 @item ::@r{, }.
5981 @value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
5982 @end table
5983
5984 @quotation
5985 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
5986 treats the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
5987 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
5988 @code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
5989 @end quotation
5990
5991 @cindex Modula-2 built-ins
5992 @node Built-In Func/Proc
5993 @subsubsection Built-in functions and procedures
5994
5995 Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
5996 In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
5997
5998 @table @var
5999
6000 @item a
6001 represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
6002
6003 @item c
6004 represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
6005
6006 @item i
6007 represents a variable or constant of integral type.
6008
6009 @item m
6010 represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
6011 same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
6012 be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}).
6013
6014 @item n
6015 represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
6016
6017 @item r
6018 represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
6019
6020 @item t
6021 represents a type.
6022
6023 @item v
6024 represents a variable.
6025
6026 @item x
6027 represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
6028 explanation of the function for details.
6029 @end table
6030
6031 All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
6032
6033 @table @code
6034 @item ABS(@var{n})
6035 Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
6036
6037 @item CAP(@var{c})
6038 If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
6039 equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument
6040
6041 @item CHR(@var{i})
6042 Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
6043
6044 @item DEC(@var{v})
6045 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
6046
6047 @item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
6048 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
6049 new value.
6050
6051 @item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
6052 Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
6053 set.
6054
6055 @item FLOAT(@var{i})
6056 Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
6057
6058 @item HIGH(@var{a})
6059 Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
6060
6061 @item INC(@var{v})
6062 Increments the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
6063
6064 @item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
6065 Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
6066 new value.
6067
6068 @item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
6069 Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
6070 there. Returns the new set.
6071
6072 @item MAX(@var{t})
6073 Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
6074
6075 @item MIN(@var{t})
6076 Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
6077
6078 @item ODD(@var{i})
6079 Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
6080
6081 @item ORD(@var{x})
6082 Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
6083 value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines supporting the
6084 ASCII character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
6085 integral, character and enumerated types.
6086
6087 @item SIZE(@var{x})
6088 Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
6089
6090 @item TRUNC(@var{r})
6091 Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
6092
6093 @item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
6094 Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
6095 @end table
6096
6097 @quotation
6098 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
6099 @value{GDBN} treats the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
6100 an error.
6101 @end quotation
6102
6103 @cindex Modula-2 constants
6104 @node M2 Constants
6105 @subsubsection Constants
6106
6107 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
6108 ways:
6109
6110 @itemize @bullet
6111
6112 @item
6113 Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
6114 expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
6115 rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
6116 trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
6117
6118 @item
6119 Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
6120 decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
6121 then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
6122 @samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
6123 digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
6124 digits.
6125
6126 @item
6127 Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
6128 like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
6129 also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value, usually)
6130 followed by a @samp{C}.
6131
6132 @item
6133 String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
6134 pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
6135 Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
6136 Constants, ,C and C++ constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
6137 sequences.
6138
6139 @item
6140 Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
6141
6142 @item
6143 Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
6144 @code{FALSE}.
6145
6146 @item
6147 Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
6148
6149 @item
6150 Set constants are not yet supported.
6151 @end itemize
6152
6153 @node M2 Defaults
6154 @subsubsection Modula-2 defaults
6155 @cindex Modula-2 defaults
6156
6157 If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
6158 both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
6159 Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
6160 selected the working language.
6161
6162 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
6163 code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} sets the
6164 working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
6165 the language automatically}, for further details.
6166
6167 @node Deviations
6168 @subsubsection Deviations from standard Modula-2
6169 @cindex Modula-2, deviations from
6170
6171 A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
6172 This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
6173
6174 @itemize @bullet
6175 @item
6176 Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
6177 integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
6178 debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
6179 pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
6180 through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
6181 returned a pointer.)
6182
6183 @item
6184 C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
6185 non-printable characters. @value{GDBN} prints out strings with these
6186 escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
6187 printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
6188
6189 @item
6190 The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
6191 argument.
6192
6193 @item
6194 All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
6195 @end itemize
6196
6197 @node M2 Checks
6198 @subsubsection Modula-2 type and range checks
6199 @cindex Modula-2 checks
6200
6201 @quotation
6202 @emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
6203 range checking.
6204 @end quotation
6205 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
6206
6207 @value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
6208
6209 @itemize @bullet
6210 @item
6211 They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
6212 @var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
6213
6214 @item
6215 They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
6216 GNU Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
6217 @end itemize
6218
6219 As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
6220 whose types are not equivalent is an error.
6221
6222 Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
6223 index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
6224
6225 @node M2 Scope
6226 @subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
6227 @cindex scope
6228 @kindex .
6229 @cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
6230 @ifinfo
6231 @kindex colon-colon
6232 @c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
6233 @end ifinfo
6234 @iftex
6235 @kindex ::
6236 @end iftex
6237
6238 There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
6239 (@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
6240 similar syntax:
6241
6242 @example
6243
6244 @var{module} . @var{id}
6245 @var{scope} :: @var{id}
6246 @end example
6247
6248 @noindent
6249 where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
6250 @var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
6251 identifier within your program, except another module.
6252
6253 Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
6254 specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
6255 found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} searches all scopes
6256 enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
6257
6258 Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
6259 the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
6260 definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
6261 an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
6262 module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
6263 @var{module}.
6264
6265 @node GDB/M2
6266 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
6267
6268 Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
6269 Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
6270 specifically to C and C++: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
6271 @samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
6272 apply to C++, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
6273 analogue in Modula-2.
6274
6275 The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
6276 while using any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
6277 intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
6278 created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C++. However, because an
6279 address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
6280 @samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful. (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions})
6281
6282 @cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
6283 In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
6284 interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
6285
6286 @end ifset
6287 @end ifclear
6288
6289 @node Symbols
6290 @chapter Examining the Symbol Table
6291
6292 The commands described in this section allow you to inquire about the
6293 symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
6294 program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
6295 does not change as your program executes. @value{GDBN} finds it in your
6296 program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
6297 (@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing files}), or by one of the
6298 file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
6299
6300 @c FIXME! This might be intentionally specific to C and C++; if so, move
6301 @c to someplace in C section of lang chapter.
6302 @cindex symbol names
6303 @cindex names of symbols
6304 @cindex quoting names
6305 Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
6306 characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
6307 most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
6308 source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program variables}). File names
6309 are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
6310 ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
6311 @samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
6312 @samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
6313
6314 @example
6315 p 'foo.c'::x
6316 @end example
6317
6318 @noindent
6319 looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
6320
6321 @table @code
6322 @item info address @var{symbol}
6323 @kindex info address
6324 Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
6325 variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
6326 local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
6327 is always stored.
6328
6329 Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
6330 at all for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints
6331 the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
6332
6333 @item whatis @var{exp}
6334 @kindex whatis
6335 Print the data type of expression @var{exp}. @var{exp} is not
6336 actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
6337 assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
6338 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
6339
6340 @item whatis
6341 Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
6342
6343 @item ptype @var{typename}
6344 @kindex ptype
6345 Print a description of data type @var{typename}. @var{typename} may be
6346 the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form
6347 @ifclear CONLY
6348 @samp{class @var{class-name}},
6349 @end ifclear
6350 @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union @var{union-tag}} or
6351 @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
6352
6353 @item ptype @var{exp}
6354 @itemx ptype
6355 Print a description of the type of expression @var{exp}. @code{ptype}
6356 differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
6357 of just the name of the type.
6358
6359 For example, for this variable declaration:
6360
6361 @example
6362 struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
6363 @end example
6364
6365 @noindent
6366 the two commands give this output:
6367
6368 @example
6369 @group
6370 (@value{GDBP}) whatis v
6371 type = struct complex
6372 (@value{GDBP}) ptype v
6373 type = struct complex @{
6374 double real;
6375 double imag;
6376 @}
6377 @end group
6378 @end example
6379
6380 @noindent
6381 As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
6382 the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
6383
6384 @item info types @var{regexp}
6385 @itemx info types
6386 @kindex info types
6387 Print a brief description of all types whose name matches @var{regexp}
6388 (or all types in your program, if you supply no argument). Each
6389 complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
6390 @samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
6391 name includes the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
6392 information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
6393
6394 This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
6395 @code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
6396 lists all source files where a type is defined.
6397
6398 @item info source
6399 @kindex info source
6400 Show the name of the current source file---that is, the source file for
6401 the function containing the current point of execution---and the language
6402 it was written in.
6403
6404 @item info sources
6405 @kindex info sources
6406 Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
6407 debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
6408 have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
6409
6410 @item info functions
6411 @kindex info functions
6412 Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
6413
6414 @item info functions @var{regexp}
6415 Print the names and data types of all defined functions
6416 whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
6417 Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
6418 include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
6419 start with @code{step}.
6420
6421 @item info variables
6422 @kindex info variables
6423 Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
6424 outside of functions (i.e., excluding local variables).
6425
6426 @item info variables @var{regexp}
6427 Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
6428 variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
6429 @var{regexp}.
6430
6431 @ignore
6432 This was never implemented.
6433 @item info methods
6434 @itemx info methods @var{regexp}
6435 @kindex info methods
6436 The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
6437 methods within C++ program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
6438 specific set of methods found in the various C++ classes. Many
6439 C++ classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
6440 from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use. The
6441 @code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
6442 which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
6443 @end ignore
6444
6445 @item maint print symbols @var{filename}
6446 @itemx maint print psymbols @var{filename}
6447 @itemx maint print msymbols @var{filename}
6448 @kindex maint print symbols
6449 @cindex symbol dump
6450 @kindex maint print psymbols
6451 @cindex partial symbol dump
6452 Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file @var{filename}.
6453 These commands are used to debug the @value{GDBN} symbol-reading code. Only
6454 symbols with debugging data are included. If you use @samp{maint print
6455 symbols}, @value{GDBN} includes all the symbols for which it has already
6456 collected full details: that is, @var{filename} reflects symbols for
6457 only those files whose symbols @value{GDBN} has read. You can use the
6458 command @code{info sources} to find out which files these are. If you
6459 use @samp{maint print psymbols} instead, the dump shows information about
6460 symbols that @value{GDBN} only knows partially---that is, symbols defined in
6461 files that @value{GDBN} has skimmed, but not yet read completely. Finally,
6462 @samp{maint print msymbols} dumps just the minimal symbol information
6463 required for each object file from which @value{GDBN} has read some symbols.
6464 @xref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}, for a discussion of how
6465 @value{GDBN} reads symbols (in the description of @code{symbol-file}).
6466 @end table
6467
6468 @node Altering
6469 @chapter Altering Execution
6470
6471 Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want to
6472 find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would lead to
6473 correct results in the rest of the run. You can find the answer by
6474 experiment, using the @value{GDBN} features for altering execution of the
6475 program.
6476
6477 For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
6478 locations,
6479 @ifclear BARETARGET
6480 give your program a signal, restart it
6481 @end ifclear
6482 @ifset BARETARGET
6483 restart your program
6484 @end ifset
6485 at a different address, or even return prematurely from a function to
6486 its caller.
6487
6488 @menu
6489 * Assignment:: Assignment to variables
6490 * Jumping:: Continuing at a different address
6491 @ifclear BARETARGET
6492 * Signaling:: Giving your program a signal
6493 @end ifclear
6494
6495 * Returning:: Returning from a function
6496 * Calling:: Calling your program's functions
6497 * Patching:: Patching your program
6498 @end menu
6499
6500 @node Assignment
6501 @section Assignment to variables
6502
6503 @cindex assignment
6504 @cindex setting variables
6505 To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
6506 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}. For example,
6507
6508 @example
6509 print x=4
6510 @end example
6511
6512 @noindent
6513 stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
6514 value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
6515 @ifclear CONLY
6516 @xref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages}, for more
6517 information on operators in supported languages.
6518 @end ifclear
6519
6520 @kindex set variable
6521 @cindex variables, setting
6522 If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use the
6523 @code{set} command instead of the @code{print} command. @code{set} is
6524 really the same as @code{print} except that the expression's value is
6525 not printed and is not put in the value history (@pxref{Value History,
6526 ,Value history}). The expression is evaluated only for its effects.
6527
6528 If the beginning of the argument string of the @code{set} command
6529 appears identical to a @code{set} subcommand, use the @code{set
6530 variable} command instead of just @code{set}. This command is identical
6531 to @code{set} except for its lack of subcommands. For example, if
6532 your program has a variable @code{width}, you get
6533 an error if you try to set a new value with just @samp{set width=13},
6534 because @value{GDBN} has the command @code{set width}:
6535
6536 @example
6537 (@value{GDBP}) whatis width
6538 type = double
6539 (@value{GDBP}) p width
6540 $4 = 13
6541 (@value{GDBP}) set width=47
6542 Invalid syntax in expression.
6543 @end example
6544
6545 @noindent
6546 The invalid expression, of course, is @samp{=47}. In
6547 order to actually set the program's variable @code{width}, use
6548
6549 @example
6550 (@value{GDBP}) set var width=47
6551 @end example
6552
6553 @value{GDBN} allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
6554 freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
6555 and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
6556 same length or shorter.
6557 @comment FIXME: how do structs align/pad in these conversions?
6558 @comment /pesch@cygnus.com 18dec1990
6559
6560 To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the @samp{@{@dots{}@}}
6561 construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
6562 (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). For example, @code{@{int@}0x83040} refers
6563 to memory location @code{0x83040} as an integer (which implies a certain size
6564 and representation in memory), and
6565
6566 @example
6567 set @{int@}0x83040 = 4
6568 @end example
6569
6570 @noindent
6571 stores the value 4 into that memory location.
6572
6573 @node Jumping
6574 @section Continuing at a different address
6575
6576 Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
6577 it stopped, with the @code{continue} command. You can instead continue at
6578 an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
6579
6580 @table @code
6581 @item jump @var{linespec}
6582 @kindex jump
6583 Resume execution at line @var{linespec}. Execution stops again
6584 immediately if there is a breakpoint there. @xref{List, ,Printing
6585 source lines}, for a description of the different forms of
6586 @var{linespec}.
6587
6588 The @code{jump} command does not change the current stack frame, or
6589 the stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
6590 register other than the program counter. If line @var{linespec} is in
6591 a different function from the one currently executing, the results may
6592 be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of arguments or
6593 of local variables. For this reason, the @code{jump} command requests
6594 confirmation if the specified line is not in the function currently
6595 executing. However, even bizarre results are predictable if you are
6596 well acquainted with the machine-language code of your program.
6597
6598 @item jump *@var{address}
6599 Resume execution at the instruction at address @var{address}.
6600 @end table
6601
6602 You can get much the same effect as the @code{jump} command by storing a
6603 new value into the register @code{$pc}. The difference is that this
6604 does not start your program running; it only changes the address where it
6605 @emph{will} run when you continue. For example,
6606
6607 @example
6608 set $pc = 0x485
6609 @end example
6610
6611 @noindent
6612 makes the next @code{continue} command or stepping command execute at
6613 address @code{0x485}, rather than at the address where your program stopped.
6614 @xref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}.
6615
6616 The most common occasion to use the @code{jump} command is to back up,
6617 perhaps with more breakpoints set, over a portion of a program that has
6618 already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail.
6619
6620 @ifclear BARETARGET
6621 @c @group
6622 @node Signaling
6623 @section Giving your program a signal
6624
6625 @table @code
6626 @item signal @var{signal}
6627 @kindex signal
6628 Resume execution where your program stopped, but immediately give it the
6629 signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the name or the number of a
6630 signal. For example, on many systems @code{signal 2} and @code{signal
6631 SIGINT} are both ways of sending an interrupt signal.
6632
6633 Alternatively, if @var{signal} is zero, continue execution without
6634 giving a signal. This is useful when your program stopped on account of
6635 a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed with the
6636 @code{continue} command; @samp{signal 0} causes it to resume without a
6637 signal.
6638
6639 @code{signal} does not repeat when you press @key{RET} a second time
6640 after executing the command.
6641 @end table
6642 @c @end group
6643
6644 Invoking the @code{signal} command is not the same as invoking the
6645 @code{kill} utility from the shell. Sending a signal with @code{kill}
6646 causes @value{GDBN} to decide what to do with the signal depending on
6647 the signal handling tables (@pxref{Signals}). The @code{signal} command
6648 passes the signal directly to your program.
6649
6650 @end ifclear
6651
6652 @node Returning
6653 @section Returning from a function
6654
6655 @table @code
6656 @item return
6657 @itemx return @var{expression}
6658 @cindex returning from a function
6659 @kindex return
6660 You can cancel execution of a function call with the @code{return}
6661 command. If you give an
6662 @var{expression} argument, its value is used as the function's return
6663 value.
6664 @end table
6665
6666 When you use @code{return}, @value{GDBN} discards the selected stack frame
6667 (and all frames within it). You can think of this as making the
6668 discarded frame return prematurely. If you wish to specify a value to
6669 be returned, give that value as the argument to @code{return}.
6670
6671 This pops the selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a
6672 frame}), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as the
6673 innermost remaining frame. That frame becomes selected. The
6674 specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values
6675 of functions.
6676
6677 The @code{return} command does not resume execution; it leaves the
6678 program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
6679 returned. In contrast, the @code{finish} command (@pxref{Continuing
6680 and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}) resumes execution until the
6681 selected stack frame returns naturally.
6682
6683 @node Calling
6684 @section Calling program functions
6685
6686 @cindex calling functions
6687 @kindex call
6688 @table @code
6689 @item call @var{expr}
6690 Evaluate the expression @var{expr} without displaying @code{void}
6691 returned values.
6692 @end table
6693
6694 You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
6695 execute a function from your program, but without cluttering the output
6696 with @code{void} returned values. The result is printed and saved in
6697 the value history, if it is not void.
6698
6699 @node Patching
6700 @section Patching programs
6701 @cindex patching binaries
6702 @cindex writing into executables
6703 @ifclear BARETARGET
6704 @cindex writing into corefiles
6705 @end ifclear
6706
6707 By default, @value{GDBN} opens the file containing your program's executable
6708 code
6709 @ifclear BARETARGET
6710 (or the corefile)
6711 @end ifclear
6712 read-only. This prevents accidental alterations
6713 to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally patching
6714 your program's binary.
6715
6716 If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
6717 explicitly with the @code{set write} command. For example, you might
6718 want to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency
6719 repairs.
6720
6721 @table @code
6722 @item set write on
6723 @itemx set write off
6724 @kindex set write
6725 If you specify @samp{set write on}, @value{GDBN} opens executable
6726 @ifclear BARETARGET
6727 and core
6728 @end ifclear
6729 files for both reading and writing; if you specify @samp{set write
6730 off} (the default), @value{GDBN} opens them read-only.
6731
6732 If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using the
6733 @code{exec-file}
6734 @ifclear BARETARGET
6735 or @code{core-file}
6736 @end ifclear
6737 command) after changing @code{set write}, for your new setting to take
6738 effect.
6739
6740 @item show write
6741 @kindex show write
6742 Display whether executable files
6743 @ifclear BARETARGET
6744 and core files
6745 @end ifclear
6746 are opened for writing as well as reading.
6747 @end table
6748
6749 @node GDB Files
6750 @chapter @value{GDBN} Files
6751
6752 @value{GDBN} needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged, both in
6753 order to read its symbol table and in order to start your program.
6754 @ifclear BARETARGET
6755 To debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell @value{GDBN}
6756 the name of the core dump file.
6757 @end ifclear
6758
6759 @menu
6760 * Files:: Commands to specify files
6761 * Symbol Errors:: Errors reading symbol files
6762 @end menu
6763
6764 @node Files
6765 @section Commands to specify files
6766 @cindex symbol table
6767
6768 @ifclear BARETARGET
6769 @cindex core dump file
6770 The usual way to specify executable and core dump file names is with
6771 the command arguments given when you start @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation,
6772 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6773 @end ifclear
6774 @ifset BARETARGET
6775 The usual way to specify an executable file name is with
6776 the command argument given when you start @value{GDBN}, (@pxref{Invocation,
6777 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6778 @end ifset
6779
6780 Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
6781 @value{GDBN} session. Or you may run @value{GDBN} and forget to specify
6782 a file you want to use. In these situations the @value{GDBN} commands
6783 to specify new files are useful.
6784
6785 @table @code
6786 @item file @var{filename}
6787 @cindex executable file
6788 @kindex file
6789 Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
6790 symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the program
6791 executed when you use the @code{run} command. If you do not specify a
6792 directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory, @value{GDBN}
6793 uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of directories to
6794 search, just as the shell does when looking for a program to run. You
6795 can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN} and your program,
6796 using the @code{path} command.
6797
6798 On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary file
6799 @file{@var{filename}.syms} may hold symbol table information for
6800 @var{filename}. If so, @value{GDBN} maps in the symbol table from
6801 @file{@var{filename}.syms}, starting up more quickly. See the
6802 descriptions of the options @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow}
6803 (available on the command line, and with the commands @code{file},
6804 @code{symbol-file}, or @code{add-symbol-file}), for more information.
6805
6806 @item file
6807 @code{file} with no argument makes @value{GDBN} discard any information it
6808 has on both executable file and the symbol table.
6809
6810 @item exec-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6811 @kindex exec-file
6812 Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is found
6813 in @var{filename}. @value{GDBN} searches the environment variable @code{PATH}
6814 if necessary to locate your program. Omitting @var{filename} means to
6815 discard information on the executable file.
6816
6817 @item symbol-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6818 @kindex symbol-file
6819 Read symbol table information from file @var{filename}. @code{PATH} is
6820 searched when necessary. Use the @code{file} command to get both symbol
6821 table and program to run from the same file.
6822
6823 @code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out @value{GDBN} information on your
6824 program's symbol table.
6825
6826 The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents of its
6827 convenience variables, the value history, and all breakpoints and
6828 auto-display expressions. This is because they may contain pointers to
6829 the internal data recording symbols and data types, which are part of
6830 the old symbol table data being discarded inside @value{GDBN}.
6831
6832 @code{symbol-file} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
6833 executing it once.
6834
6835 When @value{GDBN} is configured for a particular environment, it
6836 understands debugging information in whatever format is the standard
6837 generated for that environment; you may use either a GNU compiler, or
6838 other compilers that adhere to the local conventions. Best results are
6839 usually obtained from GNU compilers; for example, using @code{@value{GCC}}
6840 you can generate debugging information for optimized code.
6841
6842 On some kinds of object files, the @code{symbol-file} command does not
6843 normally read the symbol table in full right away. Instead, it scans
6844 the symbol table quickly to find which source files and which symbols
6845 are present. The details are read later, one source file at a time,
6846 as they are needed.
6847
6848 The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make @value{GDBN} start up
6849 faster. For the most part, it is invisible except for occasional
6850 pauses while the symbol table details for a particular source file are
6851 being read. (The @code{set verbose} command can turn these pauses
6852 into messages if desired. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings
6853 and messages}.)
6854
6855 We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet. When the
6856 symbol table is stored in COFF format, @code{symbol-file} reads the
6857 symbol table data in full right away.
6858
6859 @item symbol-file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6860 @itemx file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6861 @kindex readnow
6862 @cindex reading symbols immediately
6863 @cindex symbols, reading immediately
6864 @kindex mapped
6865 @cindex memory-mapped symbol file
6866 @cindex saving symbol table
6867 You can override the @value{GDBN} two-stage strategy for reading symbol
6868 tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
6869 load symbol table information, if you want to be sure @value{GDBN} has the
6870 entire symbol table available.
6871
6872 @ifclear BARETARGET
6873 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the
6874 @code{mmap} system call, you can use another option, @samp{-mapped}, to
6875 cause @value{GDBN} to write the symbols for your program into a reusable
6876 file. Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions map in symbol information
6877 from this auxiliary symbol file (if the program has not changed), rather
6878 than spending time reading the symbol table from the executable
6879 program. Using the @samp{-mapped} option has the same effect as
6880 starting @value{GDBN} with the @samp{-mapped} command-line option.
6881
6882 You can use both options together, to make sure the auxiliary symbol
6883 file has all the symbol information for your program.
6884
6885 The auxiliary symbol file for a program called @var{myprog} is called
6886 @samp{@var{myprog}.syms}. Once this file exists (so long as it is newer
6887 than the corresponding executable), @value{GDBN} always attempts to use
6888 it when you debug @var{myprog}; no special options or commands are
6889 needed.
6890
6891 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where you run
6892 @value{GDBN}. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN}
6893 symbol table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
6894
6895 @c FIXME: for now no mention of directories, since this seems to be in
6896 @c flux. 13mar1992 status is that in theory GDB would look either in
6897 @c current dir or in same dir as myprog; but issues like competing
6898 @c GDB's, or clutter in system dirs, mean that in practice right now
6899 @c only current dir is used. FFish says maybe a special GDB hierarchy
6900 @c (eg rooted in val of env var GDBSYMS) could exist for mappable symbol
6901 @c files.
6902
6903 @item core-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6904 @kindex core
6905 @kindex core-file
6906 Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the ``contents
6907 of memory''. Traditionally, core files contain only some parts of the
6908 address space of the process that generated them; @value{GDBN} can access the
6909 executable file itself for other parts.
6910
6911 @code{core-file} with no argument specifies that no core file is
6912 to be used.
6913
6914 Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually running
6915 under @value{GDBN}. So, if you have been running your program and you wish to
6916 debug a core file instead, you must kill the subprocess in which the
6917 program is running. To do this, use the @code{kill} command
6918 (@pxref{Kill Process, ,Killing the child process}).
6919 @end ifclear
6920
6921 @item load @var{filename}
6922 @kindex load
6923 @ifset GENERIC
6924 Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
6925 @value{GDBN}, the @code{load} command may be available. Where it exists, it
6926 is meant to make @var{filename} (an executable) available for debugging
6927 on the remote system---by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
6928 @code{load} also records the @var{filename} symbol table in @value{GDBN}, like
6929 the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
6930
6931 If your @value{GDBN} does not have a @code{load} command, attempting to
6932 execute it gets the error message ``@code{You can't do that when your
6933 target is @dots{}}''
6934 @end ifset
6935
6936 The file is loaded at whatever address is specified in the executable.
6937 For some object file formats, you can specify the load address when you
6938 link the program; for other formats, like a.out, the object file format
6939 specifies a fixed address.
6940 @c FIXME! This would be a good place for an xref to the GNU linker doc.
6941
6942 @ifset VXWORKS
6943 On VxWorks, @code{load} links @var{filename} dynamically on the
6944 current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
6945 @end ifset
6946
6947 @ifset I960
6948 @cindex download to Nindy-960
6949 With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load}
6950 downloads @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
6951 @value{GDBN}.
6952 @end ifset
6953
6954 @ifset H8
6955 @cindex download to H8/300 or H8/500
6956 @cindex H8/300 or H8/500 download
6957 @cindex download to Hitachi SH
6958 @cindex Hitachi SH download
6959 When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board
6960 (@pxref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}),
6961 the @code{load} command downloads your program to the Hitachi board and also
6962 opens it as the current executable target for @value{GDBN} on your host
6963 (like the @code{file} command).
6964 @end ifset
6965
6966 @code{load} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
6967
6968 @ifclear BARETARGET
6969 @item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
6970 @itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6971 @kindex add-symbol-file
6972 @cindex dynamic linking
6973 The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table information
6974 from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command when @var{filename}
6975 has been dynamically loaded (by some other means) into the program that
6976 is running. @var{address} should be the memory address at which the
6977 file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure this out for itself.
6978 You can specify @var{address} as an expression.
6979
6980 The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
6981 originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command. You can use the
6982 @code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data thus
6983 read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data instead,
6984 use the @code{symbol-file} command.
6985
6986 @code{add-symbol-file} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
6987
6988 You can use the @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} options just as with
6989 the @code{symbol-file} command, to change how @value{GDBN} manages the symbol
6990 table information for @var{filename}.
6991 @end ifclear
6992
6993 @item info files
6994 @itemx info target
6995 @kindex info files
6996 @kindex info target
6997 @code{info files} and @code{info target} are synonymous; both print
6998 the current target (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}),
6999 including the
7000 @ifclear BARETARGET
7001 names of the executable and core dump files
7002 @end ifclear
7003 @ifset BARETARGET
7004 name of the executable file
7005 @end ifset
7006 currently in use by @value{GDBN}, and the files from which symbols were
7007 loaded. The command @code{help target} lists all possible targets
7008 rather than current ones.
7009 @end table
7010
7011 All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
7012 as arguments. @value{GDBN} always converts the file name to an absolute file
7013 name and remembers it that way.
7014
7015 @ifclear BARETARGET
7016 @cindex shared libraries
7017 @value{GDBN} supports SunOS, SVr4, Irix 5, and IBM RS/6000 shared libraries.
7018 @value{GDBN} automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
7019 when you use the @code{run} command, or when you examine a core file.
7020 (Before you issue the @code{run} command, @value{GDBN} does not understand
7021 references to a function in a shared library, however---unless you are
7022 debugging a core file).
7023 @c FIXME: some @value{GDBN} release may permit some refs to undef
7024 @c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared
7025 @c FIXME...lib; check this from time to time when updating manual
7026
7027 @table @code
7028 @item info share
7029 @itemx info sharedlibrary
7030 @kindex info sharedlibrary
7031 @kindex info share
7032 Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.
7033
7034 @item sharedlibrary @var{regex}
7035 @itemx share @var{regex}
7036 @kindex sharedlibrary
7037 @kindex share
7038 This is an obsolescent command; you can use it to explicitly load shared
7039 object library symbols for files matching a Unix regular expression, but
7040 as with files loaded automatically, it only loads shared libraries
7041 required by your program for a core file or after typing @code{run}. If
7042 @var{regex} is omitted all shared libraries required by your program are
7043 loaded.
7044 @end table
7045 @end ifclear
7046
7047 @node Symbol Errors
7048 @section Errors reading symbol files
7049
7050 While reading a symbol file, @value{GDBN} occasionally encounters problems,
7051 such as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
7052 output. By default, @value{GDBN} does not notify you of such problems, since
7053 they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
7054 debugging compilers. If you are interested in seeing information
7055 about ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask @value{GDBN} to print
7056 only one message about each such type of problem, no matter how many
7057 times the problem occurs; or you can ask @value{GDBN} to print more messages,
7058 to see how many times the problems occur, with the @code{set
7059 complaints} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
7060 messages}).
7061
7062 The messages currently printed, and their meanings, include:
7063
7064 @table @code
7065 @item inner block not inside outer block in @var{symbol}
7066
7067 The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
7068 (such as at the start of a function or a block of statements). This
7069 error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully contained
7070 in its outer scope blocks.
7071
7072 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it had
7073 the same scope as the outer block. In the error message, @var{symbol}
7074 may be shown as ``@code{(don't know)}'' if the outer block is not a
7075 function.
7076
7077 @item block at @var{address} out of order
7078
7079 The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
7080 order of increasing addresses. This error indicates that it does not
7081 do so.
7082
7083 @value{GDBN} does not circumvent this problem, and has trouble
7084 locating symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading. (You
7085 can often determine what source file is affected by specifying
7086 @code{set verbose on}. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
7087 messages}.)
7088
7089 @item bad block start address patched
7090
7091 The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
7092 smaller than the address of the preceding source line. This is known
7093 to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
7094
7095 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
7096 starting on the previous source line.
7097
7098 @item bad string table offset in symbol @var{n}
7099
7100 @cindex foo
7101 Symbol number @var{n} contains a pointer into the string table which is
7102 larger than the size of the string table.
7103
7104 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
7105 name @code{foo}, which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
7106 with this name.
7107
7108 @item unknown symbol type @code{0x@var{nn}}
7109
7110 The symbol information contains new data types that @value{GDBN} does not yet
7111 know how to read. @code{0x@var{nn}} is the symbol type of the misunderstood
7112 information, in hexadecimal.
7113
7114 @value{GDBN} circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information. This
7115 usually allows you to debug your program, though certain symbols
7116 are not accessible. If you encounter such a problem and feel like
7117 debugging it, you can debug @code{@value{GDBP}} with itself, breakpoint on
7118 @code{complain}, then go up to the function @code{read_dbx_symtab} and
7119 examine @code{*bufp} to see the symbol.
7120
7121 @item stub type has NULL name
7122 @value{GDBN} could not find the full definition for
7123 @ifclear CONLY
7124 a struct or class.
7125 @end ifclear
7126 @ifset CONLY
7127 a struct.
7128 @end ifset
7129
7130 @ifclear CONLY
7131 @item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
7132
7133 The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
7134 information that recent versions of the compiler should have output
7135 for it.
7136 @end ifclear
7137
7138 @item info mismatch between compiler and debugger
7139
7140 @value{GDBN} could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
7141 @end table
7142
7143 @node Targets
7144 @chapter Specifying a Debugging Target
7145 @cindex debugging target
7146 @kindex target
7147
7148 A @dfn{target} is the execution environment occupied by your program.
7149 @ifclear BARETARGET
7150 Often, @value{GDBN} runs in the same host environment as your program; in
7151 that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when you
7152 use the @code{file} or @code{core} commands. When you need more
7153 flexibility---for example, running @value{GDBN} on a physically separate
7154 host, or controlling a standalone system over a serial port or a
7155 realtime system over a TCP/IP connection---you
7156 @end ifclear
7157 @ifset BARETARGET
7158 You
7159 @end ifset
7160 can use the @code{target} command to specify one of the target types
7161 configured for @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing
7162 targets}).
7163
7164 @menu
7165 * Active Targets:: Active targets
7166 * Target Commands:: Commands for managing targets
7167 * Remote:: Remote debugging
7168 @end menu
7169
7170 @node Active Targets
7171 @section Active targets
7172 @cindex stacking targets
7173 @cindex active targets
7174 @cindex multiple targets
7175
7176 @ifclear BARETARGET
7177 There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
7178 executable files. @value{GDBN} can work concurrently on up to three active
7179 targets, one in each class. This allows you to (for example) start a
7180 process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on a core
7181 file.
7182
7183 For example, if you execute @samp{gdb a.out}, then the executable file
7184 @code{a.out} is the only active target. If you designate a core file as
7185 well---presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped---then
7186 @value{GDBN} has two active targets and uses them in tandem, looking
7187 first in the corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy
7188 requests for memory addresses. (Typically, these two classes of target
7189 are complementary, since core files contain only a program's
7190 read-write memory---variables and so on---plus machine status, while
7191 executable files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
7192 @end ifclear
7193
7194 When you type @code{run}, your executable file becomes an active process
7195 target as well. When a process target is active, all @value{GDBN} commands
7196 requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in an
7197 @ifclear BARETARGET
7198 active core file or
7199 @end ifclear
7200 executable file target are obscured while the process
7201 target is active.
7202
7203 @ifset BARETARGET
7204 Use the @code{exec-file} command to select a
7205 new executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
7206 files}).
7207 @end ifset
7208 @ifclear BARETARGET
7209 Use the @code{core-file} and @code{exec-file} commands to select a
7210 new core file or executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
7211 files}). To specify as a target a process that is already running, use
7212 the @code{attach} command (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an
7213 already-running process}).
7214 @end ifclear
7215
7216 @node Target Commands
7217 @section Commands for managing targets
7218
7219 @table @code
7220 @item target @var{type} @var{parameters}
7221 Connects the @value{GDBN} host environment to a target
7222 @ifset BARETARGET
7223 machine.
7224 @end ifset
7225 @ifclear BARETARGET
7226 machine or process. A target is typically a protocol for talking to
7227 debugging facilities. You use the argument @var{type} to specify the
7228 type or protocol of the target machine.
7229
7230 Further @var{parameters} are interpreted by the target protocol, but
7231 typically include things like device names or host names to connect
7232 with, process numbers, and baud rates.
7233 @end ifclear
7234
7235 The @code{target} command does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again
7236 after executing the command.
7237
7238 @item help target
7239 @kindex help target
7240 Displays the names of all targets available. To display targets
7241 currently selected, use either @code{info target} or @code{info files}
7242 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
7243
7244 @item help target @var{name}
7245 Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
7246 select it.
7247 @end table
7248
7249 Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
7250 configuration):
7251
7252 @table @code
7253 @item target exec @var{program}
7254 @kindex target exec
7255 An executable file. @samp{target exec @var{program}} is the same as
7256 @samp{exec-file @var{program}}.
7257
7258 @ifclear BARETARGET
7259 @item target core @var{filename}
7260 @kindex target core
7261 A core dump file. @samp{target core @var{filename}} is the same as
7262 @samp{core-file @var{filename}}.
7263 @end ifclear
7264
7265 @ifset REMOTESTUB
7266 @item target remote @var{dev}
7267 @kindex target remote
7268 Remote serial target in GDB-specific protocol. The argument @var{dev}
7269 specifies what serial device to use for the connection (e.g.
7270 @file{/dev/ttya}). @xref{Remote, ,Remote debugging}.
7271 @end ifset
7272
7273 @ifset SIMS
7274 @item target sim
7275 @kindex target sim
7276 CPU simulator. @xref{Simulator,,Simulated CPU Target}.
7277 @end ifset
7278
7279 @ifset AMD29K
7280 @item target udi @var{keyword}
7281 @kindex target udi
7282 Remote AMD29K target, using the AMD UDI protocol. The @var{keyword}
7283 argument specifies which 29K board or simulator to use. @xref{UDI29K
7284 Remote,,The UDI protocol for AMD29K}.
7285
7286 @item target amd-eb @var{dev} @var{speed} @var{PROG}
7287 @kindex target amd-eb
7288 @cindex AMD EB29K
7289 Remote PC-resident AMD EB29K board, attached over serial lines.
7290 @var{dev} is the serial device, as for @code{target remote};
7291 @var{speed} allows you to specify the linespeed; and @var{PROG} is the
7292 name of the program to be debugged, as it appears to DOS on the PC.
7293 @xref{EB29K Remote, ,The EBMON protocol for AMD29K}.
7294
7295 @end ifset
7296 @ifset H8
7297 @item target hms
7298 @kindex target hms
7299 A Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to your host.
7300 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
7301 @c Unix only, not currently of interest for H8-only manual
7302 Use special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
7303 line and the communications speed used.
7304 @end ifclear
7305 @xref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
7306
7307 @end ifset
7308 @ifset I960
7309 @item target nindy @var{devicename}
7310 @kindex target nindy
7311 An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
7312 the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
7313 @file{/dev/ttya}. @xref{i960-Nindy Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)}.
7314
7315 @end ifset
7316 @ifset ST2000
7317 @item target st2000 @var{dev} @var{speed}
7318 @kindex target st2000
7319 A Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's STDBUG protocol. @var{dev}
7320 is the name of the device attached to the ST2000 serial line;
7321 @var{speed} is the communication line speed. The arguments are not used
7322 if @value{GDBN} is configured to connect to the ST2000 using TCP or Telnet.
7323 @xref{ST2000 Remote,,@value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000}.
7324
7325 @end ifset
7326 @ifset VXWORKS
7327 @item target vxworks @var{machinename}
7328 @kindex target vxworks
7329 A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
7330 is the target system's machine name or IP address.
7331 @xref{VxWorks Remote, ,@value{GDBN} and VxWorks}.
7332 @end ifset
7333 @end table
7334
7335 @ifset GENERIC
7336 Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN}; your
7337 configuration may have more or fewer targets.
7338 @end ifset
7339
7340 @node Remote
7341 @section Remote debugging
7342 @cindex remote debugging
7343
7344 If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
7345 GDB in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging. For
7346 example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel, or on
7347 a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
7348 powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
7349
7350 Some configurations of GDB have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
7351 to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition,
7352 GDB comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to GDB, but
7353 not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
7354 write the remote stubs---the code that runs on the remote system to
7355 communicate with GDB.
7356
7357 Other remote targets may be available in your
7358 configuration of GDB; use @code{help target} to list them.
7359
7360 @ifset GENERIC
7361 @c Text on starting up GDB in various specific cases; it goes up front
7362 @c in manuals configured for any of those particular situations, here
7363 @c otherwise.
7364 @menu
7365 @ifset REMOTESTUB
7366 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
7367 @end ifset
7368 @ifset I960
7369 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
7370 @end ifset
7371 @ifset AMD29K
7372 * UDI29K Remote:: The UDI protocol for AMD29K
7373 * EB29K Remote:: The EBMON protocol for AMD29K
7374 @end ifset
7375 @ifset VXWORKS
7376 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
7377 @end ifset
7378 @ifset ST2000
7379 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
7380 @end ifset
7381 @ifset H8
7382 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
7383 @end ifset
7384 @ifset MIPS
7385 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
7386 @end ifset
7387 @ifset SIMS
7388 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
7389 @end ifset
7390 @end menu
7391
7392 @include remote.texi
7393 @end ifset
7394
7395 @node Controlling GDB
7396 @chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
7397
7398 You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using
7399 the @code{set} command. For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
7400 data, @pxref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}; other settings are described here.
7401
7402 @menu
7403 * Prompt:: Prompt
7404 * Editing:: Command editing
7405 * History:: Command history
7406 * Screen Size:: Screen size
7407 * Numbers:: Numbers
7408 * Messages/Warnings:: Optional warnings and messages
7409 @end menu
7410
7411 @node Prompt
7412 @section Prompt
7413 @cindex prompt
7414
7415 @value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
7416 called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. You
7417 can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
7418 instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
7419 the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell which
7420 one you are talking to.
7421
7422 @table @code
7423 @item set prompt @var{newprompt}
7424 @kindex set prompt
7425 Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
7426 @kindex show prompt
7427 @item show prompt
7428 Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
7429 @end table
7430
7431 @node Editing
7432 @section Command editing
7433 @cindex readline
7434 @cindex command line editing
7435
7436 @value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface. This
7437 GNU library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
7438 command line interface to the user. Advantages are @code{emacs}-style
7439 or @code{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
7440 substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
7441 debugging sessions.
7442
7443 You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
7444 command @code{set}.
7445
7446 @table @code
7447 @kindex set editing
7448 @cindex editing
7449 @item set editing
7450 @itemx set editing on
7451 Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
7452
7453 @item set editing off
7454 Disable command line editing.
7455
7456 @kindex show editing
7457 @item show editing
7458 Show whether command line editing is enabled.
7459 @end table
7460
7461 @node History
7462 @section Command history
7463
7464 @value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
7465 debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
7466 happened. Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
7467 history facility.
7468
7469 @table @code
7470 @cindex history substitution
7471 @cindex history file
7472 @kindex set history filename
7473 @kindex GDBHISTFILE
7474 @item set history filename @var{fname}
7475 Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}.
7476 This is the file where @value{GDBN} reads an initial command history
7477 list, and where it writes the command history from this session when it
7478 exits. You can access this list through history expansion or through
7479 the history command editing characters listed below. This file defaults
7480 to the value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
7481 @file{./.gdb_history} if this variable is not set.
7482
7483 @cindex history save
7484 @kindex set history save
7485 @item set history save
7486 @itemx set history save on
7487 Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
7488 @code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
7489
7490 @item set history save off
7491 Stop recording command history in a file.
7492
7493 @cindex history size
7494 @kindex set history size
7495 @item set history size @var{size}
7496 Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} keeps in its history list.
7497 This defaults to the value of the environment variable
7498 @code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
7499 @end table
7500
7501 @cindex history expansion
7502 History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
7503 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7504 @xref{Event Designators}.
7505 @end ifset
7506
7507 Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
7508 is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
7509 @code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
7510 follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
7511 a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
7512 history facilities do not attempt substitution on the strings
7513 @kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
7514
7515 The commands to control history expansion are:
7516
7517 @table @code
7518
7519 @kindex set history expansion
7520 @item set history expansion on
7521 @itemx set history expansion
7522 Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
7523
7524 @item set history expansion off
7525 Disable history expansion.
7526
7527 The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
7528 editing and history expansion features. Users unfamiliar with @code{emacs}
7529 or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
7530 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7531 @xref{Command Line Editing}.
7532 @end ifset
7533
7534 @c @group
7535 @kindex show history
7536 @item show history
7537 @itemx show history filename
7538 @itemx show history save
7539 @itemx show history size
7540 @itemx show history expansion
7541 These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
7542 @code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
7543 @c @end group
7544 @end table
7545
7546 @table @code
7547 @kindex show commands
7548 @item show commands
7549 Display the last ten commands in the command history.
7550
7551 @item show commands @var{n}
7552 Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
7553
7554 @item show commands +
7555 Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
7556 @end table
7557
7558 @node Screen Size
7559 @section Screen size
7560 @cindex size of screen
7561 @cindex pauses in output
7562
7563 Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
7564 information output to the screen. To help you read all of it,
7565 @value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
7566 output. Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
7567 to discard the remaining output. Also, the screen width setting
7568 determines when to wrap lines of output. Depending on what is being
7569 printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
7570 rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
7571
7572 Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the termcap data base
7573 together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
7574 @code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
7575 you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
7576 width} commands:
7577
7578 @table @code
7579 @item set height @var{lpp}
7580 @itemx show height
7581 @itemx set width @var{cpl}
7582 @itemx show width
7583 @kindex set height
7584 @kindex set width
7585 @kindex show width
7586 @kindex show height
7587 These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
7588 a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
7589 commands display the current settings.
7590
7591 If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} does not pause during output
7592 no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a file
7593 or to an editor buffer.
7594
7595 Likewise, you can specify @samp{set width 0} to prevent @value{GDBN}
7596 from wrapping its output.
7597 @end table
7598
7599 @node Numbers
7600 @section Numbers
7601 @cindex number representation
7602 @cindex entering numbers
7603
7604 You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in @value{GDBN} by
7605 the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with @samp{0}, decimal
7606 numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers begin with @samp{0x}.
7607 Numbers that begin with none of these are, by default, entered in base
7608 10; likewise, the default display for numbers---when no particular
7609 format is specified---is base 10. You can change the default base for
7610 both input and output with the @code{set radix} command.
7611
7612 @table @code
7613 @kindex set radix
7614 @item set radix @var{base}
7615 Set the default base for numeric input and display. Supported choices
7616 for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
7617 specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
7618 example, any of
7619
7620 @example
7621 set radix 012
7622 set radix 10.
7623 set radix 0xa
7624 @end example
7625
7626 @noindent
7627 sets the base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
7628 leaves the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
7629
7630 @kindex show radix
7631 @item show radix
7632 Display the current default base for numeric input and display.
7633 @end table
7634
7635 @node Messages/Warnings
7636 @section Optional warnings and messages
7637
7638 By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings. If you are running
7639 on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose} command.
7640 It makes @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy internal operation, so
7641 you will not think it has crashed.
7642
7643 Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
7644 which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
7645 see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
7646
7647 @table @code
7648 @kindex set verbose
7649 @item set verbose on
7650 Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7651
7652 @item set verbose off
7653 Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7654
7655 @kindex show verbose
7656 @item show verbose
7657 Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
7658 @end table
7659
7660 By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an object
7661 file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may find
7662 this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors reading symbol files}).
7663
7664 @table @code
7665 @kindex set complaints
7666 @item set complaints @var{limit}
7667 Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of unusual
7668 symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set @var{limit} to
7669 zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number to prevent
7670 complaints from being suppressed.
7671
7672 @kindex show complaints
7673 @item show complaints
7674 Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
7675 @end table
7676
7677 By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
7678 lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
7679 you try to run a program which is already running:
7680
7681 @example
7682 (@value{GDBP}) run
7683 The program being debugged has been started already.
7684 Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
7685 @end example
7686
7687 If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
7688 commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
7689
7690 @table @code
7691 @kindex set confirm
7692 @cindex flinching
7693 @cindex confirmation
7694 @cindex stupid questions
7695 @item set confirm off
7696 Disables confirmation requests.
7697
7698 @item set confirm on
7699 Enables confirmation requests (the default).
7700
7701 @item show confirm
7702 @kindex show confirm
7703 Displays state of confirmation requests.
7704 @end table
7705
7706 @c FIXME this does not really belong here. But where *does* it belong?
7707 @cindex reloading symbols
7708 Some systems allow individual object files that make up your program to
7709 be replaced without stopping and restarting your program.
7710 @ifset VXWORKS
7711 For example, in VxWorks you can simply recompile a defective object file
7712 and keep on running.
7713 @end ifset
7714 If you are running on one of these systems, you can allow @value{GDBN} to
7715 reload the symbols for automatically relinked modules:
7716
7717 @table @code
7718 @kindex set symbol-reloading
7719 @item set symbol-reloading on
7720 Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file when an
7721 object file with a particular name is seen again.
7722
7723 @item set symbol-reloading off
7724 Do not replace symbol definitions when re-encountering object files of
7725 the same name. This is the default state; if you are not running on a
7726 system that permits automatically relinking modules, you should leave
7727 @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN} may discard symbols
7728 when linking large programs, that may contain several modules (from
7729 different directories or libraries) with the same name.
7730
7731 @item show symbol-reloading
7732 Show the current @code{on} or @code{off} setting.
7733 @end table
7734
7735 @node Sequences
7736 @chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
7737
7738 Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
7739 command lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of commands
7740 for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command files.
7741
7742 @menu
7743 * Define:: User-defined commands
7744 * Hooks:: User-defined command hooks
7745 * Command Files:: Command files
7746 * Output:: Commands for controlled output
7747 @end menu
7748
7749 @node Define
7750 @section User-defined commands
7751
7752 @cindex user-defined command
7753 A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to which you
7754 assign a new name as a command. This is done with the @code{define}
7755 command.
7756
7757 @table @code
7758 @item define @var{commandname}
7759 @kindex define
7760 Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
7761 by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
7762
7763 The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
7764 which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
7765 commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
7766
7767 @item document @var{commandname}
7768 @kindex document
7769 Give documentation to the user-defined command @var{commandname}. The
7770 command @var{commandname} must already be defined. This command reads
7771 lines of documentation just as @code{define} reads the lines of the
7772 command definition, ending with @code{end}. After the @code{document}
7773 command is finished, @code{help} on command @var{commandname} displays
7774 the documentation you have specified.
7775
7776 You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
7777 documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
7778 does not change the documentation.
7779
7780 @item help user-defined
7781 @kindex help user-defined
7782 List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
7783 (if any) for each.
7784
7785 @item show user
7786 @itemx show user @var{commandname}
7787 @kindex show user
7788 Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but not its
7789 documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
7790 definitions for all user-defined commands.
7791 @end table
7792
7793 User-defined commands do not take arguments. When they are executed, the
7794 commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
7795 stops execution of the user-defined command.
7796
7797 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7798 without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many @value{GDBN} commands
7799 that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7800 when used in a user-defined command.
7801
7802 @node Hooks
7803 @section User-defined command hooks
7804 @cindex command files
7805
7806 You may define @emph{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
7807 command. Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
7808 command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
7809 before that command.
7810
7811 In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists. Defining
7812 (@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
7813 execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
7814 displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
7815
7816 @ifclear BARETARGET
7817 For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
7818 single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
7819 you could define:
7820
7821 @example
7822 define hook-stop
7823 handle SIGALRM nopass
7824 end
7825
7826 define hook-run
7827 handle SIGALRM pass
7828 end
7829
7830 define hook-continue
7831 handle SIGLARM pass
7832 end
7833 @end example
7834 @end ifclear
7835
7836 You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
7837 not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
7838 name, e.g. @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
7839 @c FIXME! So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
7840 @c or not?
7841 If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
7842 @value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
7843 (before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
7844
7845 If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
7846 get a warning from the @code{define} command.
7847
7848 @node Command Files
7849 @section Command files
7850
7851 @cindex command files
7852 A command file for @value{GDBN} is a file of lines that are @value{GDBN} commands. Comments
7853 (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included. An empty line in a
7854 command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat the last command, as
7855 it would from the terminal.
7856
7857 @cindex init file
7858 @cindex @file{@value{GDBINIT}}
7859 When you start @value{GDBN}, it automatically executes commands from its
7860 @dfn{init files}. These are files named @file{@value{GDBINIT}}.
7861 @value{GDBN} reads the init file (if any) in your home directory, then
7862 processes command line options and operands, and then reads the init
7863 file (if any) in the current working directory. This is so the init
7864 file in your home directory can set options (such as @code{set
7865 complaints}) which affect the processing of the command line options and
7866 operands. The init files are not executed if you use the @samp{-nx}
7867 option; @pxref{Mode Options, ,Choosing modes}.
7868
7869 @ifset GENERIC
7870 @cindex init file name
7871 On some configurations of @value{GDBN}, the init file is known by a
7872 different name (these are typically environments where a specialized
7873 form of GDB may need to coexist with other forms, hence a different name
7874 for the specialized version's init file). These are the environments
7875 with special init file names:
7876
7877 @itemize @bullet
7878 @kindex .vxgdbinit
7879 @item
7880 VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): @samp{.vxgdbinit}
7881
7882 @kindex .os68gdbinit
7883 @item
7884 OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): @samp{.os68gdbinit}
7885
7886 @kindex .esgdbinit
7887 @item
7888 ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): @samp{.esgdbinit}
7889 @end itemize
7890 @end ifset
7891
7892 You can also request the execution of a command file with the
7893 @code{source} command:
7894
7895 @table @code
7896 @item source @var{filename}
7897 @kindex source
7898 Execute the command file @var{filename}.
7899 @end table
7900
7901 The lines in a command file are executed sequentially. They are not
7902 printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates execution
7903 of the command file.
7904
7905 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7906 without asking when used in a command file. Many @value{GDBN} commands that
7907 normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7908 when called from command files.
7909
7910 @node Output
7911 @section Commands for controlled output
7912
7913 During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
7914 @value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
7915 explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
7916 describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
7917 want.
7918
7919 @table @code
7920 @item echo @var{text}
7921 @kindex echo
7922 @c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
7923 @c because it is not in ANSI.
7924 Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
7925 @var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
7926 newline. @strong{No newline is printed unless you specify one.}
7927 In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
7928 by a space stands for a space. This is useful for displaying a
7929 string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
7930 trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
7931 To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
7932 @samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
7933
7934 A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
7935 the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
7936
7937 @example
7938 echo This is some text\n\
7939 which is continued\n\
7940 onto several lines.\n
7941 @end example
7942
7943 produces the same output as
7944
7945 @example
7946 echo This is some text\n
7947 echo which is continued\n
7948 echo onto several lines.\n
7949 @end example
7950
7951 @item output @var{expression}
7952 @kindex output
7953 Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
7954 newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
7955 value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on
7956 expressions.
7957
7958 @item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
7959 Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
7960 the same formats as for @code{print}. @xref{Output Formats,,Output
7961 formats}, for more information.
7962
7963 @item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
7964 @kindex printf
7965 Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
7966 @var{string}. The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may be
7967 either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as specified by
7968 @var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute the C
7969 subroutine
7970
7971 @example
7972 printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
7973 @end example
7974
7975 For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
7976
7977 @smallexample
7978 printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
7979 @end smallexample
7980
7981 The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
7982 string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
7983 letter.
7984 @end table
7985
7986 @ifclear DOSHOST
7987 @node Emacs
7988 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
7989
7990 @cindex emacs
7991 A special interface allows you to use GNU Emacs to view (and
7992 edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
7993 @value{GDBN}.
7994
7995 To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
7996 executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
7997 @value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
7998 created Emacs buffer.
7999
8000 Using @value{GDBN} under Emacs is just like using @value{GDBN} normally except for two
8001 things:
8002
8003 @itemize @bullet
8004 @item
8005 All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
8006 @end itemize
8007
8008 This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
8009 and output done by the program you are debugging.
8010
8011 This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
8012 commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
8013 in this way.
8014
8015 All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
8016 with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
8017 way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
8018 stop.
8019
8020 @itemize @bullet
8021 @item
8022 @value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
8023 @end itemize
8024
8025 Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
8026 source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
8027 left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
8028 source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
8029 and the source.
8030
8031 Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
8032 usual, but you probably have no reason to use them from Emacs.
8033
8034 @quotation
8035 @emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
8036 current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
8037 the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer does not
8038 appear to show your source. @value{GDBN} can find programs by searching your
8039 environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the @value{GDBN} input and output
8040 session proceeds normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
8041 back from @value{GDBN} to locate the source files in this situation. To
8042 avoid this problem, either start @value{GDBN} mode from the directory where
8043 your program resides, or specify an absolute file name when prompted for the
8044 @kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
8045
8046 A similar confusion can result if you use the @value{GDBN} @code{file} command to
8047 switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
8048 @value{GDBN} buffer in Emacs.
8049 @end quotation
8050
8051 By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If
8052 you need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you keep
8053 several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
8054 Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
8055
8056 @example
8057 (setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
8058 @end example
8059
8060 @noindent
8061 (preceded by @kbd{ESC ESC}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
8062 in your @file{.emacs} file) makes Emacs call the program named
8063 ``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
8064
8065 In the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
8066 addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
8067
8068 @table @kbd
8069 @item C-h m
8070 Describe the features of Emacs' @value{GDBN} Mode.
8071
8072 @item M-s
8073 Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
8074 update the display window to show the current file and location.
8075
8076 @item M-n
8077 Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
8078 calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command. Then update the display window
8079 to show the current file and location.
8080
8081 @item M-i
8082 Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
8083 display window accordingly.
8084
8085 @item M-x gdb-nexti
8086 Execute to next instruction, using the @value{GDBN} @code{nexti} command; update
8087 display window accordingly.
8088
8089 @item C-c C-f
8090 Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
8091 @code{finish} command.
8092
8093 @item M-c
8094 Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
8095 command.
8096
8097 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
8098
8099 @item M-u
8100 Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
8101 (@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}),
8102 like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
8103
8104 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
8105
8106 @item M-d
8107 Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
8108 @value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
8109
8110 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
8111
8112 @item C-x &
8113 Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
8114 of the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer. For example, if you wish to disassemble code
8115 around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
8116 then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
8117 argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
8118
8119 You can customize this further by defining elements of the list
8120 @code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
8121 otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
8122 inserted. A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} indicates that you
8123 wish special formatting, and also acts as an index to pick an element of the
8124 list. If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
8125 formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
8126 is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
8127 @end table
8128
8129 In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
8130 tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
8131
8132 If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
8133 it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
8134 request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this recreates
8135 the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
8136 frame.
8137
8138 The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
8139 which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
8140 the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
8141 communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
8142 delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows cease
8143 to correspond properly with the code.
8144
8145 @c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
8146 @c if/when v19 does something similar. ---pesch@cygnus.com 19dec1990
8147 @ignore
8148 @kindex emacs epoch environment
8149 @kindex epoch
8150 @kindex inspect
8151
8152 Version 18 of Emacs has a built-in window system called the @code{epoch}
8153 environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
8154 @code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
8155 each value is printed in its own window.
8156 @end ignore
8157 @end ifclear
8158
8159 @ifset LUCID
8160 @node Energize
8161 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Energize
8162
8163 @cindex Energize
8164 The Energize Programming System is an integrated development environment
8165 that includes a point-and-click interface to many programming tools.
8166 When you use @value{GDBN} in this environment, you can use the standard
8167 Energize graphical interface to drive @value{GDBN}; you can also, if you
8168 choose, type @value{GDBN} commands as usual in a debugging window. Even if
8169 you use the graphical interface, the debugging window (which uses Emacs,
8170 and resembles the standard Emacs interface to @value{GDBN}) displays the
8171 equivalent commands, so that the history of your debugging session is
8172 properly reflected.
8173
8174 When Energize starts up a @value{GDBN} session, it uses one of the
8175 command-line options @samp{-energize} or @samp{-cadillac} (``cadillac''
8176 is the name of the communications protocol used by the Energize system).
8177 This option makes @value{GDBN} run as one of the tools in the Energize Tool
8178 Set: it sends all output to the Energize kernel, and accept input from
8179 it as well.
8180
8181 See the user manual for the Energize Programming System for
8182 information on how to use the Energize graphical interface and the other
8183 development tools that Energize integrates with @value{GDBN}.
8184
8185 @end ifset
8186
8187 @node GDB Bugs
8188 @chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
8189 @cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
8190 @cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
8191
8192 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
8193
8194 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
8195 may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
8196 the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better. Bug
8197 reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
8198
8199 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8200 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8201
8202 @menu
8203 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8204 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8205 @end menu
8206
8207 @node Bug Criteria
8208 @section Have you found a bug?
8209 @cindex bug criteria
8210
8211 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8212
8213 @itemize @bullet
8214 @item
8215 @cindex fatal signal
8216 @cindex debugger crash
8217 @cindex crash of debugger
8218 If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8219 @value{GDBN} bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
8220
8221 @item
8222 @cindex error on valid input
8223 If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8224
8225 @item
8226 @cindex invalid input
8227 If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
8228 that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
8229 ``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
8230 for traditional practice''.
8231
8232 @item
8233 If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
8234 for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
8235 @end itemize
8236
8237 @node Bug Reporting
8238 @section How to report bugs
8239 @cindex bug reports
8240 @cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
8241
8242 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
8243 If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
8244 contact that organization first.
8245
8246 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8247 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the GNU Emacs
8248 distribution.
8249
8250 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @value{GDBN} to one
8251 of these addresses:
8252
8253 @example
8254 bug-gdb@@prep.ai.mit.edu
8255 @{ucbvax|mit-eddie|uunet@}!prep.ai.mit.edu!bug-gdb
8256 @end example
8257
8258 @strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
8259 @samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of @value{GDBN} do not want to
8260 receive bug reports. Those that do, have arranged to receive @samp{bug-gdb}.
8261
8262 The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
8263 serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
8264 the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
8265 newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
8266 problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
8267 path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
8268 we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
8269 bug reports to the mailing list.
8270
8271 As a last resort, send bug reports on paper to:
8272
8273 @example
8274 GNU Debugger Bugs
8275 Free Software Foundation
8276 545 Tech Square
8277 Cambridge, MA 02139
8278 @end example
8279
8280 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8281 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8282 fact or leave it out, state it!
8283
8284 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8285 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8286 assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
8287 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
8288 stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
8289 name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
8290 of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
8291 the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
8292 easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
8293
8294 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8295 the bug if it is new to us. It is not as important as what happens if
8296 the bug is already known. Therefore, always write your bug reports on
8297 the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8298
8299 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8300 bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
8301 @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
8302 bugs properly.
8303
8304 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8305
8306 @itemize @bullet
8307 @item
8308 The version of @value{GDBN}. @value{GDBN} announces it if you start with no
8309 arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show version}.
8310
8311 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8312 the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
8313
8314 @item
8315 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8316 version number.
8317
8318 @item
8319 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.
8320 ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
8321
8322 @item
8323 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you
8324 are debugging---e.g. ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
8325
8326 @item
8327 The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
8328 observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
8329 you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
8330 Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8331
8332 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8333 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8334
8335 @item
8336 A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
8337 reproduce the bug.
8338
8339 @item
8340 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8341 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8342
8343 Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we will
8344 certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8345 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. We are human, after all. You
8346 might as well not give us a chance to make a mistake.
8347
8348 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8349 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as,
8350 your copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a
8351 bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy
8352 might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash,
8353 then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not
8354 happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we
8355 would not be able to draw any conclusion from our observations.
8356
8357 @item
8358 If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
8359 diffs. If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
8360 it by context, not by line number.
8361
8362 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8363 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8364 @end itemize
8365
8366 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8367
8368 @itemize @bullet
8369 @item
8370 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8371
8372 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8373 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8374 changes will not affect it.
8375
8376 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8377 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8378 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8379 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8380
8381 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8382 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8383 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8384 less time, and so on.
8385
8386 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8387 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8388
8389 @item
8390 A patch for the bug.
8391
8392 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8393 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8394 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8395 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8396
8397 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
8398 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8399 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
8400 to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8401
8402 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8403 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8404 help us to understand.
8405
8406 @item
8407 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8408
8409 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8410 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8411 @end itemize
8412
8413 @c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
8414 @c and consists of the two following files:
8415 @c rluser.texinfo
8416 @c inc-hist.texi
8417 @c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
8418 @c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
8419 @include rluser.texinfo
8420 @include inc-hist.texi
8421
8422 @ifset NOVEL
8423 @node Renamed Commands
8424 @appendix Renamed Commands
8425
8426 The following commands were renamed in GDB 4, in order to make the
8427 command set as a whole more consistent and easier to use and remember:
8428
8429 @kindex add-syms
8430 @kindex delete environment
8431 @kindex info copying
8432 @kindex info convenience
8433 @kindex info directories
8434 @kindex info editing
8435 @kindex info history
8436 @kindex info targets
8437 @kindex info values
8438 @kindex info version
8439 @kindex info warranty
8440 @kindex set addressprint
8441 @kindex set arrayprint
8442 @kindex set prettyprint
8443 @kindex set screen-height
8444 @kindex set screen-width
8445 @kindex set unionprint
8446 @kindex set vtblprint
8447 @kindex set demangle
8448 @kindex set asm-demangle
8449 @kindex set sevenbit-strings
8450 @kindex set array-max
8451 @kindex set caution
8452 @kindex set history write
8453 @kindex show addressprint
8454 @kindex show arrayprint
8455 @kindex show prettyprint
8456 @kindex show screen-height
8457 @kindex show screen-width
8458 @kindex show unionprint
8459 @kindex show vtblprint
8460 @kindex show demangle
8461 @kindex show asm-demangle
8462 @kindex show sevenbit-strings
8463 @kindex show array-max
8464 @kindex show caution
8465 @kindex show history write
8466 @kindex unset
8467
8468 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8469 @ifinfo
8470 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8471 @example
8472 OLD COMMAND NEW COMMAND
8473 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8474 --------------- -------------------------------
8475 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8476 add-syms add-symbol-file
8477 delete environment unset environment
8478 info convenience show convenience
8479 info copying show copying
8480 info directories show directories
8481 info editing show commands
8482 info history show values
8483 info targets help target
8484 info values show values
8485 info version show version
8486 info warranty show warranty
8487 set/show addressprint set/show print address
8488 set/show array-max set/show print elements
8489 set/show arrayprint set/show print array
8490 set/show asm-demangle set/show print asm-demangle
8491 set/show caution set/show confirm
8492 set/show demangle set/show print demangle
8493 set/show history write set/show history save
8494 set/show prettyprint set/show print pretty
8495 set/show screen-height set/show height
8496 set/show screen-width set/show width
8497 set/show sevenbit-strings set/show print sevenbit-strings
8498 set/show unionprint set/show print union
8499 set/show vtblprint set/show print vtbl
8500
8501 unset [No longer an alias for delete]
8502 @end example
8503 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8504 @end ifinfo
8505
8506 @tex
8507 \vskip \parskip\vskip \baselineskip
8508 \halign{\tt #\hfil &\qquad#&\tt #\hfil\cr
8509 {\bf Old Command} &&{\bf New Command}\cr
8510 add-syms &&add-symbol-file\cr
8511 delete environment &&unset environment\cr
8512 info convenience &&show convenience\cr
8513 info copying &&show copying\cr
8514 info directories &&show directories \cr
8515 info editing &&show commands\cr
8516 info history &&show values\cr
8517 info targets &&help target\cr
8518 info values &&show values\cr
8519 info version &&show version\cr
8520 info warranty &&show warranty\cr
8521 set{\rm / }show addressprint &&set{\rm / }show print address\cr
8522 set{\rm / }show array-max &&set{\rm / }show print elements\cr
8523 set{\rm / }show arrayprint &&set{\rm / }show print array\cr
8524 set{\rm / }show asm-demangle &&set{\rm / }show print asm-demangle\cr
8525 set{\rm / }show caution &&set{\rm / }show confirm\cr
8526 set{\rm / }show demangle &&set{\rm / }show print demangle\cr
8527 set{\rm / }show history write &&set{\rm / }show history save\cr
8528 set{\rm / }show prettyprint &&set{\rm / }show print pretty\cr
8529 set{\rm / }show screen-height &&set{\rm / }show height\cr
8530 set{\rm / }show screen-width &&set{\rm / }show width\cr
8531 set{\rm / }show sevenbit-strings &&set{\rm / }show print sevenbit-strings\cr
8532 set{\rm / }show unionprint &&set{\rm / }show print union\cr
8533 set{\rm / }show vtblprint &&set{\rm / }show print vtbl\cr
8534 \cr
8535 unset &&\rm(No longer an alias for delete)\cr
8536 }
8537 @end tex
8538 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8539 @end ifset
8540
8541 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
8542 @node Formatting Documentation
8543 @appendix Formatting Documentation
8544
8545 @cindex GDB reference card
8546 @cindex reference card
8547 The GDB 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
8548 for printing with PostScript or Ghostscript, in the @file{gdb}
8549 subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
8550 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
8551 release.}. If you can use PostScript or Ghostscript with your printer,
8552 you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
8553
8554 The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
8555 can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
8556
8557 @example
8558 make refcard.dvi
8559 @end example
8560
8561 The GDB reference card is designed to print in landscape mode on US
8562 ``letter'' size paper; that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
8563 high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
8564 your @sc{dvi} output program.
8565
8566 @cindex documentation
8567
8568 All the documentation for GDB comes as part of the machine-readable
8569 distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
8570 a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
8571 on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
8572 formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
8573 and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
8574
8575 GDB includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info version of
8576 this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info file is
8577 @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
8578 subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
8579 necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
8580 but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in GNU Emacs
8581 or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the GNU
8582 Texinfo distribution.
8583
8584 If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
8585 Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
8586 @code{makeinfo}.
8587
8588 If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level GDB
8589 source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of version @value{GDBVN}), you can
8590 make the Info file by typing:
8591
8592 @example
8593 cd gdb
8594 make gdb.info
8595 @end example
8596
8597 If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
8598 a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
8599 Texinfo definitions file.
8600
8601 @TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
8602 produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
8603 document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
8604 has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
8605 command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
8606 (for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may
8607 require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
8608
8609 @TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
8610 @file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
8611 written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot read, much less
8612 typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
8613 and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
8614 directory.
8615
8616 If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
8617 typeset and print this manual. First switch to the the @file{gdb}
8618 subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
8619 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and then type:
8620
8621 @example
8622 make gdb.dvi
8623 @end example
8624
8625 @node Installing GDB
8626 @appendix Installing GDB
8627 @cindex configuring GDB
8628 @cindex installation
8629
8630 GDB comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
8631 of preparing GDB for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
8632 build the @code{gdb} program.
8633 @iftex
8634 @c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
8635 @footnote{If you have a more recent version of GDB than @value{GDBVN},
8636 look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
8637 installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
8638 @end iftex
8639
8640 The GDB distribution includes all the source code you need for GDB in
8641 a single directory, whose name is usually composed by appending the
8642 version number to @samp{gdb}.
8643
8644 For example, the GDB version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
8645 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory. That directory contains:
8646
8647 @table @code
8648 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
8649 script for configuring GDB and all its supporting libraries.
8650
8651 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
8652 the source specific to GDB itself
8653
8654 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8655 source for the Binary File Descriptor library
8656
8657 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
8658 GNU include files
8659
8660 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
8661 source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
8662
8663 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
8664 source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
8665
8666 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
8667 source for the GNU command-line interface
8668
8669 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
8670 source for the GNU filename pattern-matching subroutine
8671
8672 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
8673 source for the GNU memory-mapped malloc package
8674 @end table
8675
8676 The simplest way to configure and build GDB is to run @code{configure}
8677 from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
8678 this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
8679
8680 First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
8681 if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}. Pass the
8682 identifier for the platform on which GDB will run as an
8683 argument.
8684
8685 For example:
8686
8687 @example
8688 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8689 ./configure @var{host}
8690 make
8691 @end example
8692
8693 @noindent
8694 where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
8695 @samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where GDB will run.
8696 (You can often leave off @var{host}; @code{configure} tries to guess the
8697 correct value by examining your system.)
8698
8699 Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
8700 @file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
8701 libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
8702 binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
8703
8704 @code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
8705 system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
8706 shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
8707
8708 @example
8709 sh configure @var{host}
8710 @end example
8711
8712 If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
8713 directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
8714 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN}, @code{configure}
8715 creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
8716 you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
8717
8718 You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
8719 subordinate directories in the GDB distribution if you only want to
8720 configure that subdirectory, but be sure to specify a path to it.
8721
8722 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, type the following to configure only
8723 the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
8724
8725 @example
8726 @group
8727 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8728 ../configure @var{host}
8729 @end group
8730 @end example
8731
8732 You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
8733 However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
8734 the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
8735 that GDB uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
8736 let GDB debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
8737
8738 @menu
8739 * Separate Objdir:: Compiling GDB in another directory
8740 * Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
8741 * configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
8742 @end menu
8743
8744 @node Separate Objdir
8745 @section Compiling GDB in another directory
8746
8747 If you want to run GDB versions for several host or target machines,
8748 you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
8749 host and target. @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
8750 allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
8751 rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
8752 handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (GNU @code{make} does), running
8753 @code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
8754 program specified there.
8755
8756 To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
8757 with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
8758 (You also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
8759 itself from your working directory. If the path to @code{configure}
8760 would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
8761 the @samp{--srcdir} option; it is assumed.)
8762
8763 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build GDB in a separate
8764 directory for a Sun 4 like this:
8765
8766 @example
8767 @group
8768 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8769 mkdir ../gdb-sun4
8770 cd ../gdb-sun4
8771 ../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
8772 make
8773 @end group
8774 @end example
8775
8776 When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
8777 directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
8778 (and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
8779 the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
8780 directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and GDB itself in
8781 @file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
8782
8783 One popular reason to build several GDB configurations in separate
8784 directories is to configure GDB for cross-compiling (where GDB
8785 runs on one machine---the host---while debugging programs that run on
8786 another machine---the target). You specify a cross-debugging target by
8787 giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
8788
8789 When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
8790 it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
8791 called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
8792
8793 The @code{Makefile} that @code{configure} generates in each source
8794 directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
8795 directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
8796 directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{dirname}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
8797 will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
8798
8799 When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
8800 directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
8801 if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
8802 with each other.
8803
8804 @node Config Names
8805 @section Specifying names for hosts and targets
8806
8807 The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
8808 script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
8809 aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
8810 of information in the following pattern:
8811
8812 @example
8813 @var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
8814 @end example
8815
8816 For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
8817 or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
8818 option. The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
8819
8820 The @code{configure} script accompanying GDB does not provide
8821 any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
8822 aliases. @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
8823 @code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
8824 script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
8825 abbreviations---for example:
8826
8827 @smallexample
8828 % sh config.sub sun4
8829 sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
8830 % sh config.sub sun3
8831 m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
8832 % sh config.sub decstation
8833 mips-dec-ultrix4.2
8834 % sh config.sub hp300bsd
8835 m68k-hp-bsd
8836 % sh config.sub i386v
8837 i386-unknown-sysv
8838 % sh config.sub i786v
8839 Invalid configuration `i786v': machine `i786v' not recognized
8840 @end smallexample
8841
8842 @noindent
8843 @code{config.sub} is also distributed in the GDB source
8844 directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
8845
8846 @node configure Options
8847 @section @code{configure} options
8848
8849 Here is a summary of the @code{configure} options and arguments that
8850 are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}. @code{configure} also has
8851 several other options not listed here. @inforef{What Configure
8852 Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @code{configure}.
8853 @c FIXME: Would this be more, or less, useful as an xref (ref to printed
8854 @c manual in the printed manual, ref to info file only from the info file)?
8855
8856 @example
8857 configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
8858 @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
8859 @r{[}--srcdir=@var{dirname}@r{]}
8860 @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
8861 @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]} @var{host}
8862 @end example
8863
8864 @noindent
8865 You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
8866 @samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
8867 @samp{--}.
8868
8869 @table @code
8870 @item --help
8871 Display a quick summary of how to invoke @code{configure}.
8872
8873 @item -prefix=@var{dir}
8874 Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
8875 @file{@var{dir}}.
8876
8877 @c avoid splitting the warning from the explanation:
8878 @need 2000
8879 @item --srcdir=@var{dirname}
8880 @strong{Warning: using this option requires GNU @code{make}, or another
8881 @code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
8882 Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
8883 GDB source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
8884 build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
8885 directories. @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
8886 the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
8887 directory @var{dirname}. @code{configure} creates directories under
8888 the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
8889 @var{dirname}.
8890
8891 @item --norecursion
8892 Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
8893 propagate configuration to subdirectories.
8894
8895 @item --rm
8896 @emph{Remove} files otherwise built during configuration.
8897
8898 @c This does not work (yet if ever). FIXME.
8899 @c @item --parse=@var{lang} @dots{}
8900 @c Configure the GDB expression parser to parse the listed languages.
8901 @c @samp{all} configures GDB for all supported languages. To get a
8902 @c list of all supported languages, omit the argument. Without this
8903 @c option, GDB is configured to parse all supported languages.
8904
8905 @item --target=@var{target}
8906 Configure GDB for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
8907 @var{target}. Without this option, GDB is configured to debug
8908 programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as GDB itself.
8909
8910 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
8911
8912 @item @var{host} @dots{}
8913 Configure GDB to run on the specified @var{host}.
8914
8915 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
8916 @end table
8917
8918 @noindent
8919 @code{configure} accepts other options, for compatibility with
8920 configuring other GNU tools recursively; but these are the only
8921 options that affect GDB or its supporting libraries.
8922 @end ifclear
8923
8924 @node Index
8925 @unnumbered Index
8926
8927 @printindex cp
8928
8929 @tex
8930 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8931 % meantime:
8932 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8933 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8934 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8935 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8936 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8937 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/},}
8938 \centerline{{\bf\fontname\tenbf}, and}
8939 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8940 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8941 \page\colophon
8942 % Blame: pesch@cygnus.com, 1991.
8943 @end tex
8944
8945 @contents
8946 @bye